Group
Guide to the Secure Configuration of Ubuntu 20.04
Group contains 93 groups and 260 rules |
Group
System Settings
Group contains 49 groups and 176 rules |
[ref]
Contains rules that check correct system settings. |
Group
Installing and Maintaining Software
Group contains 6 groups and 9 rules |
[ref]
The following sections contain information on
security-relevant choices during the initial operating system
installation process and the setup of software
updates. |
Group
System and Software Integrity
Group contains 2 groups and 4 rules |
[ref]
System and software integrity can be gained by installing antivirus, increasing
system encryption strength with FIPS, verifying installed software, enabling SELinux,
installing an Intrusion Prevention System, etc. However, installing or enabling integrity
checking tools cannot prevent intrusions, but they can detect that an intrusion
may have occurred. Requirements for integrity checking may be highly dependent on
the environment in which the system will be used. Snapshot-based approaches such
as AIDE may induce considerable overhead in the presence of frequent software updates. |
Group
Software Integrity Checking
Group contains 1 group and 3 rules |
[ref]
Both the AIDE (Advanced Intrusion Detection Environment)
software and the RPM package management system provide
mechanisms for verifying the integrity of installed software.
AIDE uses snapshots of file metadata (such as hashes) and compares these
to current system files in order to detect changes.
The RPM package management system can conduct integrity
checks by comparing information in its metadata database with
files installed on the system. |
Group
Verify Integrity with AIDE
Group contains 3 rules |
[ref]
AIDE conducts integrity checks by comparing information about
files with previously-gathered information. Ideally, the AIDE database is
created immediately after initial system configuration, and then again after any
software update. AIDE is highly configurable, with further configuration
information located in /usr/share/doc/aide-VERSION . |
Rule
Install AIDE
[ref] | The aide package can be installed with the following command:
$ apt-get install aide | Rationale: | The AIDE package must be installed if it is to be available for integrity checking. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_aide_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R51), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.3, APO01.06, BAI01.06, BAI02.01, BAI03.05, BAI06.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS04.07, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, CCI-002696, CCI-002699, CCI-001744, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.3.4.4.4, SR 3.1, SR 3.3, SR 3.4, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.6, 1034, 1288, 1341, 1417, A.11.2.4, A.12.1.2, A.12.2.1, A.12.4.1, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.8.2.3, CM-6(a), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-7, PR.DS-1, PR.DS-6, PR.DS-8, PR.IP-1, PR.IP-3, Req-11.5, 11.5.2, SRG-OS-000445-GPOS-00199, UBTU-20-010450, 1.4.1 | |
|
Rule
Build and Test AIDE Database
[ref] | Run the following command to generate a new database:
$ sudo aideinit
By default, the database will be written to the file
/var/lib/aide/aide.db.new .
Storing the database, the configuration file /etc/aide.conf , and the binary
/usr/bin/aide.wrapper
(or hashes of these files), in a secure location (such as on read-only media) provides additional assurance about their integrity.
The newly-generated database can be installed as follows:
$ sudo cp /var/lib/aide/aide.db.new /var/lib/aide/aide.db
To initiate a manual check, run the following command:
$ sudo /usr/bin/aide.wrapper --check
If this check produces any unexpected output, investigate. | Rationale: | For AIDE to be effective, an initial database of "known-good" information about files
must be captured and it should be able to be verified against the installed files. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_aide_build_database | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R51), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.3, APO01.06, BAI01.06, BAI02.01, BAI03.05, BAI06.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS04.07, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.3.4.4.4, SR 3.1, SR 3.3, SR 3.4, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.6, A.11.2.4, A.12.1.2, A.12.2.1, A.12.4.1, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.8.2.3, CM-6(a), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-7, PR.DS-1, PR.DS-6, PR.DS-8, PR.IP-1, PR.IP-3, Req-11.5, 11.5.2, SRG-OS-000445-GPOS-00199, 1.4.1 | |
|
Rule
Configure Periodic Execution of AIDE
[ref] | At a minimum, AIDE should be configured to run a weekly scan.
To implement a daily execution of AIDE at 4:05am using cron, add the following line to /etc/crontab :
05 4 * * * root /usr/bin/aide.wrapper --config /etc/aide/aide.conf --check
To implement a weekly execution of AIDE at 4:05am using cron, add the following line to /etc/crontab :
05 4 * * 0 root /usr/bin/aide.wrapper --config /etc/aide/aide.conf --check
AIDE can be executed periodically through other means; this is merely one example.
The usage of cron's special time codes, such as @daily and
@weekly is acceptable. | Rationale: | By default, AIDE does not install itself for periodic execution. Periodically
running AIDE is necessary to reveal unexpected changes in installed files.
Unauthorized changes to the baseline configuration could make the system vulnerable
to various attacks or allow unauthorized access to the operating system. Changes to
operating system configurations can have unintended side effects, some of which may
be relevant to security.
Detecting such changes and providing an automated response can help avoid unintended,
negative consequences that could ultimately affect the security state of the operating
system. The operating system's Information Management Officer (IMO)/Information System
Security Officer (ISSO) and System Administrators (SAs) must be notified via email and/or
monitoring system trap when there is an unauthorized modification of a configuration item. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_aide_periodic_cron_checking | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R51), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.3, APO01.06, BAI01.06, BAI02.01, BAI03.05, BAI06.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS04.07, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, CCI-001744, CCI-002699, CCI-002702, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.3.4.4.4, SR 3.1, SR 3.3, SR 3.4, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.6, A.11.2.4, A.12.1.2, A.12.2.1, A.12.4.1, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.8.2.3, SI-7, SI-7(1), CM-6(a), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-7, PR.DS-1, PR.DS-6, PR.DS-8, PR.IP-1, PR.IP-3, Req-11.5, 11.5.2, SRG-OS-000363-GPOS-00150, SRG-OS-000446-GPOS-00200, SRG-OS-000447-GPOS-00201, UBTU-20-010074, 1.4.2 | |
|
Rule
Package "prelink" Must not be Installed
[ref] | The prelink package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove prelink | Rationale: | The use of the prelink package can interfere with the operation of AIDE since it binaries.
Prelinking can also increase damage caused by vulnerability in a common library like libc. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_prelink_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
1.6.3 | |
|
Group
Disk Partitioning
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
To ensure separation and protection of data, there
are top-level system directories which should be placed on their
own physical partition or logical volume. The installer's default
partitioning scheme creates separate logical volumes for
/ , /boot , and swap .
- If starting with any of the default layouts, check the box to
\"Review and modify partitioning.\" This allows for the easy creation
of additional logical volumes inside the volume group already
created, though it may require making
/ 's logical volume smaller to
create space. In general, using logical volumes is preferable to
using partitions because they can be more easily adjusted
later. - If creating a custom layout, create the partitions mentioned in
the previous paragraph (which the installer will require anyway),
as well as separate ones described in the following sections.
If a system has already been installed, and the default
partitioning
scheme was used, it is possible but nontrivial to
modify it to create separate logical volumes for the directories
listed above. The Logical Volume Manager (LVM) makes this possible.
See the LVM HOWTO at
http://tldp.org/HOWTO/LVM-HOWTO/
for more detailed information on LVM. |
Rule
Ensure /tmp Located On Separate Partition
[ref] | The /tmp directory is a world-writable directory used
for temporary file storage. Ensure it has its own partition or
logical volume at installation time, or migrate it using LVM. | Rationale: | The /tmp partition is used as temporary storage by many programs.
Placing /tmp in its own partition enables the setting of more
restrictive mount options, which can help protect programs which use it. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_partition_for_tmp | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R12), 12, 15, 8, APO13.01, DSS05.02, CCI-000366, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, CM-6(a), SC-5(2), PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 1.1.2 | |
|
Group
GNOME Desktop Environment
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
GNOME is a graphical desktop environment bundled with many Linux distributions that
allow users to easily interact with the operating system graphically rather than
textually. The GNOME Graphical Display Manager (GDM) provides login, logout, and user
switching contexts as well as display server management.
GNOME is developed by the GNOME Project and is considered the default
Red Hat Graphical environment.
For more information on GNOME and the GNOME Project, see https://www.gnome.org. |
Rule
Remove the GDM Package Group
[ref] |
By removing the gdm3 package, the system no longer has GNOME installed
installed. If X Windows is not installed then the system cannot boot into graphical user mode.
This prevents the system from being accidentally or maliciously booted into a graphical.target
mode. To do so, run the following command:
$ sudo apt remove gdm3 | Rationale: | Unnecessary service packages must not be installed to decrease the attack surface of the system.
A graphical environment is unnecessary for certain types of systems including a virtualization
hypervisor. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_gdm_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 1.10 | |
|
Group
Sudo
Group contains 3 rules |
[ref]
Sudo , which stands for "su 'do'", provides the ability to delegate authority
to certain users, groups of users, or system administrators. When configured for system
users and/or groups, Sudo can allow a user or group to execute privileged commands
that normally only root is allowed to execute.
For more information on Sudo and addition Sudo configuration options, see
https://www.sudo.ws. |
Rule
Install sudo Package
[ref] | The sudo package can be installed with the following command:
$ apt-get install sudo | Rationale: | sudo is a program designed to allow a system administrator to give
limited root privileges to users and log root activity. The basic philosophy
is to give as few privileges as possible but still allow system users to
get their work done.
| Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_sudo_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R19), 1382, 1384, 1386, CM-6(a), FMT_MOF_EXT.1, 10.2.1.5, SRG-OS-000324-GPOS-00125, 1.3.1 | |
|
Rule
Ensure Only Users Logged In To Real tty Can Execute Sudo - sudo use_pty
[ref] | The sudo use_pty tag, when specified, will only execute sudo
commands from users logged in to a real tty.
This should be enabled by making sure that the use_pty tag exists in
/etc/sudoers configuration file or any sudo configuration snippets
in /etc/sudoers.d/ . | Rationale: | Requiring that sudo commands be run in a pseudo-terminal can prevent an attacker from retaining
access to the user's terminal after the main program has finished executing. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sudo_add_use_pty | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R58), Req-10.2.5, 10.2.1.5, 1.3.2 | |
|
Rule
Ensure Sudo Logfile Exists - sudo logfile
[ref] | A custom log sudo file can be configured with the 'logfile' tag. This rule configures
a sudo custom logfile at the default location suggested by CIS, which uses
/var/log/sudo.log. | Rationale: | A sudo log file simplifies auditing of sudo commands. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sudo_custom_logfile | Identifiers and References | References:
Req-10.2.5, 10.2.1.5, 1.3.3 | |
|
Group
Account and Access Control
Group contains 13 groups and 58 rules |
[ref]
In traditional Unix security, if an attacker gains
shell access to a certain login account, they can perform any action
or access any file to which that account has access. Therefore,
making it more difficult for unauthorized people to gain shell
access to accounts, particularly to privileged accounts, is a
necessary part of securing a system. This section introduces
mechanisms for restricting access to accounts under
Ubuntu 20.04. |
Group
Warning Banners for System Accesses
Group contains 12 rules |
[ref]
Each system should expose as little information about
itself as possible.
System banners, which are typically displayed just before a
login prompt, give out information about the service or the host's
operating system. This might include the distribution name and the
system kernel version, and the particular version of a network
service. This information can assist intruders in gaining access to
the system as it can reveal whether the system is running
vulnerable software. Most network services can be configured to
limit what information is displayed.
Many organizations implement security policies that require a
system banner provide notice of the system's ownership, provide
warning to unauthorized users, and remind authorized users of their
consent to monitoring. |
Rule
Modify the System Login Banner
[ref] |
To configure the system login banner edit /etc/issue . Replace the
default text with a message compliant with the local site policy or a legal
disclaimer.
The DoD required text is either:
You are accessing a U.S. Government (USG) Information System (IS) that
is provided for USG-authorized use only. By using this IS (which includes
any device attached to this IS), you consent to the following conditions:
-The USG routinely intercepts and monitors communications on this IS
for purposes including, but not limited to, penetration testing, COMSEC
monitoring, network operations and defense, personnel misconduct (PM), law
enforcement (LE), and counterintelligence (CI) investigations.
-At any time, the USG may inspect and seize data stored on this IS.
-Communications using, or data stored on, this IS are not private,
are subject to routine monitoring, interception, and search, and may be
disclosed or used for any USG-authorized purpose.
-This IS includes security measures (e.g., authentication and access
controls) to protect USG interests -- not for your personal benefit or
privacy.
-Notwithstanding the above, using this IS does not constitute consent
to PM, LE or CI investigative searching or monitoring of the content of
privileged communications, or work product, related to personal
representation or services by attorneys, psychotherapists, or clergy, and
their assistants. Such communications and work product are private and
confidential. See User Agreement for details.
OR:
I've read & consent to terms in IS user agreem't. | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
System use notifications are required only for access via login interfaces
with human users and are not required when such human interfaces do not
exist. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_banner_etc_issue | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 15, 16, DSS05.04, DSS05.10, DSS06.10, 3.1.9, CCI-000048, CCI-000050, CCI-001384, CCI-001385, CCI-001386, CCI-001387, CCI-001388, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, A.18.1.4, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.4, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, AC-8(a), AC-8(c), PR.AC-7, FMT_MOF_EXT.1, SRG-OS-000023-GPOS-00006, SRG-OS-000228-GPOS-00088, 1.8.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Modify the System Login Banner for Remote Connections
[ref] | To configure the system login banner edit /etc/issue.net . Replace the
default text with a message compliant with the local site policy or a legal
disclaimer.
The DoD required text is either:
You are accessing a U.S. Government (USG) Information System (IS) that
is provided for USG-authorized use only. By using this IS (which includes
any device attached to this IS), you consent to the following conditions:
-The USG routinely intercepts and monitors communications on this IS
for purposes including, but not limited to, penetration testing, COMSEC
monitoring, network operations and defense, personnel misconduct (PM), law
enforcement (LE), and counterintelligence (CI) investigations.
-At any time, the USG may inspect and seize data stored on this IS.
-Communications using, or data stored on, this IS are not private,
are subject to routine monitoring, interception, and search, and may be
disclosed or used for any USG-authorized purpose.
-This IS includes security measures (e.g., authentication and access
controls) to protect USG interests -- not for your personal benefit or
privacy.
-Notwithstanding the above, using this IS does not constitute consent
to PM, LE or CI investigative searching or monitoring of the content of
privileged communications, or work product, related to personal
representation or services by attorneys, psychotherapists, or clergy, and
their assistants. Such communications and work product are private and
confidential. See User Agreement for details.
OR:
I've read & consent to terms in IS user agreem't. | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
System use notifications are required only for access via login interfaces
with human users and are not required when such human interfaces do not
exist. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_banner_etc_issue_net | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000048, CCI-001384, CCI-001385, CCI-001386, CCI-001387, CCI-001388, SRG-OS-000023-GPOS-00006, SRG-OS-000228-GPOS-00088, UBTU-20-010038, 1.8.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Modify the System Message of the Day Banner
[ref] | To configure the system message banner edit /etc/motd . Replace the
default text with a message compliant with the local site policy or a legal
disclaimer.
The DoD required text is either:
You are accessing a U.S. Government (USG) Information System (IS) that
is provided for USG-authorized use only. By using this IS (which includes
any device attached to this IS), you consent to the following conditions:
-The USG routinely intercepts and monitors communications on this IS
for purposes including, but not limited to, penetration testing, COMSEC
monitoring, network operations and defense, personnel misconduct (PM), law
enforcement (LE), and counterintelligence (CI) investigations.
-At any time, the USG may inspect and seize data stored on this IS.
-Communications using, or data stored on, this IS are not private,
are subject to routine monitoring, interception, and search, and may be
disclosed or used for any USG-authorized purpose.
-This IS includes security measures (e.g., authentication and access
controls) to protect USG interests -- not for your personal benefit or
privacy.
-Notwithstanding the above, using this IS does not constitute consent
to PM, LE or CI investigative searching or monitoring of the content of
privileged communications, or work product, related to personal
representation or services by attorneys, psychotherapists, or clergy, and
their assistants. Such communications and work product are private and
confidential. See User Agreement for details.
OR:
I've read & consent to terms in IS user agreem't. | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
System use notifications are required only for access via login interfaces
with human users and are not required when such human interfaces do not
exist. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_banner_etc_motd | Identifiers and References | References:
1.8.1.1 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Ownership of System Login Banner
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/issue , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/issue | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
Proper group ownership will ensure that only root user can modify the banner. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_etc_issue | Identifiers and References | References:
1.8.1.5 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Ownership of System Login Banner for Remote Connections
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/issue.net , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/issue.net | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
Proper group ownership will ensure that only root user can modify the banner. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_etc_issue_net | Identifiers and References | References:
1.8.1.6 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Ownership of Message of the Day Banner
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/motd , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/motd | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
Proper group ownership will ensure that only root user can modify the banner. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_etc_motd | Identifiers and References | References:
1.8.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Verify ownership of System Login Banner
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/issue , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/issue | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
Proper ownership will ensure that only root user can modify the banner. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_etc_issue | Identifiers and References | References:
1.8.1.5 | |
|
Rule
Verify ownership of System Login Banner for Remote Connections
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/issue.net , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/issue.net | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
Proper ownership will ensure that only root user can modify the banner. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_etc_issue_net | Identifiers and References | References:
1.8.1.6 | |
|
Rule
Verify ownership of Message of the Day Banner
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/motd , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/motd | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
Proper ownership will ensure that only root user can modify the banner. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_etc_motd | Identifiers and References | References:
1.8.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Verify permissions on System Login Banner
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/issue , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/issue | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
Proper permissions will ensure that only root user can modify the banner. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_issue | Identifiers and References | References:
1.8.1.5 | |
|
Rule
Verify permissions on System Login Banner for Remote Connections
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/issue.net , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/issue.net | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
Proper permissions will ensure that only root user can modify the banner. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_issue_net | Identifiers and References | References:
1.8.1.6 | |
|
Rule
Verify permissions on Message of the Day Banner
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/motd , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/motd | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
Proper permissions will ensure that only root user can modify the banner. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_motd | Identifiers and References | References:
1.8.1.4 | |
|
Group
Protect Accounts by Configuring PAM
Group contains 3 groups and 10 rules |
[ref]
PAM, or Pluggable Authentication Modules, is a system
which implements modular authentication for Linux programs. PAM provides
a flexible and configurable architecture for authentication, and it should be configured
to minimize exposure to unnecessary risk. This section contains
guidance on how to accomplish that.
PAM is implemented as a set of shared objects which are
loaded and invoked whenever an application wishes to authenticate a
user. Typically, the application must be running as root in order
to take advantage of PAM, because PAM's modules often need to be able
to access sensitive stores of account information, such as /etc/shadow.
Traditional privileged network listeners
(e.g. sshd) or SUID programs (e.g. sudo) already meet this
requirement. An SUID root application, userhelper, is provided so
that programs which are not SUID or privileged themselves can still
take advantage of PAM.
PAM looks in the directory /etc/pam.d for
application-specific configuration information. For instance, if
the program login attempts to authenticate a user, then PAM's
libraries follow the instructions in the file /etc/pam.d/login
to determine what actions should be taken.
One very important file in /etc/pam.d is
/etc/pam.d/system-auth . This file, which is included by
many other PAM configuration files, defines 'default' system authentication
measures. Modifying this file is a good way to make far-reaching
authentication changes, for instance when implementing a
centralized authentication service. Warning:
Be careful when making changes to PAM's configuration files.
The syntax for these files is complex, and modifications can
have unexpected consequences. The default configurations shipped
with applications should be sufficient for most users. |
Group
Set Lockouts for Failed Password Attempts
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
The pam_faillock PAM module provides the capability to
lock out user accounts after a number of failed login attempts. Its
documentation is available in
/usr/share/doc/pam-VERSION/txts/README.pam_faillock .
Warning:
Locking out user accounts presents the
risk of a denial-of-service attack. The lockout policy
must weigh whether the risk of such a
denial-of-service attack outweighs the benefits of thwarting
password guessing attacks. |
Rule
Limit Password Reuse
[ref] | Do not allow users to reuse recent passwords. This can be
accomplished by using the remember option for the
pam_pwhistory PAM modules.
In the file /etc/pam.d/common-password , make sure the parameters
remember and use_authtok are present, and that the value
for the remember parameter is 5 or greater. For example:
password requisite pam_pwhistory.so ...existing_options... remember=5 use_authtok
The DoD STIG requirement is 5 passwords. | Rationale: | Preventing re-use of previous passwords helps ensure that a compromised password is not re-used by a user. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_pam_pwhistory_remember | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000200, SRG-OS-000077-GPOS-00045, 5.3.3 | |
|
Rule
Set Deny For Failed Password Attempts
[ref] | The Ubuntu 20.04 operating system must lock an account after - at most - 5
consecutive invalid access attempts. | Rationale: | By limiting the number of failed logon attempts, the risk of unauthorized
system access via user password guessing, otherwise known as brute-force
attacks, is reduced. Limits are imposed by locking the account.
To configure the operating system to lock an account after three
unsuccessful consecutive access attempts using pam_tally2.so ,
modify the content of both /etc/pam.d/common-auth and
/etc/pam.d/common-account as follows:
| Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_passwords_pam_tally2 | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000044, Req-8.1.6, 8.3.4, SRG-OS-000021-GPOS-00005, UBTU-20-010072, 5.3.2 | |
|
Group
Set Password Quality Requirements
Group contains 1 group and 7 rules |
[ref]
The default pam_pwquality PAM module provides strength
checking for passwords. It performs a number of checks, such as
making sure passwords are not similar to dictionary words, are of
at least a certain length, are not the previous password reversed,
and are not simply a change of case from the previous password. It
can also require passwords to be in certain character classes. The
pam_pwquality module is the preferred way of configuring
password requirements.
The man pages pam_pwquality(8)
provide information on the capabilities and configuration of
each. |
Group
Set Password Quality Requirements with pam_pwquality
Group contains 7 rules |
[ref]
The pam_pwquality PAM module can be configured to meet
requirements for a variety of policies.
For example, to configure pam_pwquality to require at least one uppercase
character, lowercase character, digit, and other (special)
character, make sure that pam_pwquality exists in /etc/pam.d/system-auth :
password requisite pam_pwquality.so try_first_pass local_users_only retry=3 authtok_type=
If no such line exists, add one as the first line of the password section in /etc/pam.d/system-auth .
Next, modify the settings in /etc/security/pwquality.conf to match the following:
difok = 4
minlen = 14
dcredit = -1
ucredit = -1
lcredit = -1
ocredit = -1
maxrepeat = 3
The arguments can be modified to ensure compliance with
your organization's security policy. Discussion of each parameter follows. |
Rule
Ensure PAM Enforces Password Requirements - Minimum Digit Characters
[ref] | The pam_pwquality module's dcredit parameter controls requirements for
usage of digits in a password. When set to a negative number, any password will be required to
contain that many digits. When set to a positive number, pam_pwquality will grant +1 additional
length credit for each digit. Modify the dcredit setting in
/etc/security/pwquality.conf to require the use of a digit in passwords. | Rationale: | Use of a complex password helps to increase the time and resources required
to compromise the password. Password complexity, or strength, is a measure of
the effectiveness of a password in resisting attempts at guessing and brute-force
attacks.
Password complexity is one factor of several that determines how long it takes
to crack a password. The more complex the password, the greater the number of
possible combinations that need to be tested before the password is compromised.
Requiring digits makes password guessing attacks more difficult by ensuring a larger
search space. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_pam_dcredit | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R18), 1, 12, 15, 16, 5, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, CCI-000194, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, 0421, 0422, 0431, 0974, 1173, 1401, 1504, 1505, 1546, 1557, 1558, 1559, 1560, 1561, A.18.1.4, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, IA-5(c), IA-5(1)(a), CM-6(a), IA-5(4), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, FMT_SMF_EXT.1, Req-8.2.3, 8.3.6, 8.3.9, SRG-OS-000071-GPOS-00039, UBTU-20-010052, 5.3.1 | |
|
Rule
Ensure PAM Enforces Password Requirements - Minimum Lowercase Characters
[ref] | The pam_pwquality module's lcredit parameter controls requirements for
usage of lowercase letters in a password. When set to a negative number, any password will be required to
contain that many lowercase characters. When set to a positive number, pam_pwquality will grant +1 additional
length credit for each lowercase character. Modify the lcredit setting in
/etc/security/pwquality.conf to require the use of a lowercase character in passwords. | Rationale: | Use of a complex password helps to increase the time and resources required
to compromise the password. Password complexity, or strength, is a measure of
the effectiveness of a password in resisting attempts at guessing and brute-force
attacks.
Password complexity is one factor of several that determines how long it takes
to crack a password. The more complex the password, the greater the number of
possble combinations that need to be tested before the password is compromised.
Requiring a minimum number of lowercase characters makes password guessing attacks
more difficult by ensuring a larger search space. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_pam_lcredit | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R18), 1, 12, 15, 16, 5, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, CCI-000193, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, 0421, 0422, 0431, 0974, 1173, 1401, 1504, 1505, 1546, 1557, 1558, 1559, 1560, 1561, A.18.1.4, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, IA-5(c), IA-5(1)(a), CM-6(a), IA-5(4), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, FMT_SMF_EXT.1, Req-8.2.3, 8.3.6, 8.3.9, SRG-OS-000070-GPOS-00038, UBTU-20-010051, 5.3.1 | |
|
Rule
Ensure PAM Enforces Password Requirements - Minimum Different Categories
[ref] | The pam_pwquality module's minclass parameter controls
requirements for usage of different character classes, or types, of character
that must exist in a password before it is considered valid. For example,
setting this value to three (3) requires that any password must have characters
from at least three different categories in order to be approved. The default
value is zero (0), meaning there are no required classes. There are four
categories available:
* Upper-case characters
* Lower-case characters
* Digits
* Special characters (for example, punctuation)
Modify the minclass setting in /etc/security/pwquality.conf entry
to require 4
differing categories of characters when changing passwords. | Rationale: | Use of a complex password helps to increase the time and resources required to compromise the password.
Password complexity, or strength, is a measure of the effectiveness of a password in resisting attempts
at guessing and brute-force attacks.
Password complexity is one factor of several that determines how long it takes to crack a password. The
more complex the password, the greater the number of possible combinations that need to be tested before
the password is compromised.
Requiring a minimum number of character categories makes password guessing attacks more difficult
by ensuring a larger search space. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_pam_minclass | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 15, 16, 5, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, CCI-000195, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, 0421, 0422, 0431, 0974, 1173, 1401, 1504, 1505, 1546, 1557, 1558, 1559, 1560, 1561, A.18.1.4, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, IA-5(c), IA-5(1)(a), CM-6(a), IA-5(4), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, SRG-OS-000072-GPOS-00040, 5.3.1 | |
|
Rule
Ensure PAM Enforces Password Requirements - Minimum Length
[ref] | The pam_pwquality module's minlen parameter controls requirements for
minimum characters required in a password. Add minlen=14
after pam_pwquality to set minimum password length requirements. | Rationale: | The shorter the password, the lower the number of possible combinations
that need to be tested before the password is compromised.
Password complexity, or strength, is a measure of the effectiveness of a
password in resisting attempts at guessing and brute-force attacks.
Password length is one factor of several that helps to determine strength
and how long it takes to crack a password. Use of more characters in a password
helps to exponentially increase the time and/or resources required to
compromise the password. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_pam_minlen | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R18), 1, 12, 15, 16, 5, 5.6.2.1.1, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, CCI-000205, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, 0421, 0422, 0431, 0974, 1173, 1401, 1504, 1505, 1546, 1557, 1558, 1559, 1560, 1561, A.18.1.4, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, IA-5(c), IA-5(1)(a), CM-6(a), IA-5(4), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, FMT_SMF_EXT.1, Req-8.2.3, 8.3.6, 8.3.9, SRG-OS-000078-GPOS-00046, UBTU-20-010054, 5.3.1 | |
|
Rule
Ensure PAM Enforces Password Requirements - Minimum Special Characters
[ref] | The pam_pwquality module's ocredit= parameter controls requirements for
usage of special (or "other") characters in a password. When set to a negative number,
any password will be required to contain that many special characters.
When set to a positive number, pam_pwquality will grant +1
additional length credit for each special character. Modify the ocredit setting
in /etc/security/pwquality.conf to equal -1
to require use of a special character in passwords. | Rationale: | Use of a complex password helps to increase the time and resources required
to compromise the password. Password complexity, or strength, is a measure of
the effectiveness of a password in resisting attempts at guessing and brute-force
attacks.
Password complexity is one factor of several that determines how long it takes
to crack a password. The more complex the password, the greater the number of
possible combinations that need to be tested before the password is compromised.
Requiring a minimum number of special characters makes password guessing attacks
more difficult by ensuring a larger search space. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_pam_ocredit | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R18), 1, 12, 15, 16, 5, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, CCI-001619, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, 0421, 0422, 0431, 0974, 1173, 1401, 1504, 1505, 1546, 1557, 1558, 1559, 1560, 1561, A.18.1.4, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, IA-5(c), IA-5(1)(a), CM-6(a), IA-5(4), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, FMT_SMF_EXT.1, SRG-OS-000266-GPOS-00101, UBTU-20-010055, 5.3.1 | |
|
Rule
Ensure PAM Enforces Password Requirements - Authentication Retry Prompts Permitted Per-Session
[ref] | To configure the number of retry prompts that are permitted per-session:
Edit the pam_pwquality.so statement in
/etc/pam.d/common-password to show
retry=3 , or a lower value if site
policy is more restrictive. The DoD requirement is a maximum of 3 prompts
per session. | Rationale: | Setting the password retry prompts that are permitted on a per-session basis to a low value
requires some software, such as SSH, to re-connect. This can slow down and
draw additional attention to some types of password-guessing attacks. Note that this
is different from account lockout, which is provided by the pam_faillock module. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_pam_retry | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 15, 16, 3, 5, 9, 5.5.3, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, CCI-000192, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.18.1.4, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, CM-6(a), AC-7(a), IA-5(4), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.IP-1, FMT_MOF_EXT.1, SRG-OS-000069-GPOS-00037, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, UBTU-20-010057, 5.3.1 | |
|
Rule
Ensure PAM Enforces Password Requirements - Minimum Uppercase Characters
[ref] | The pam_pwquality module's ucredit= parameter controls requirements for
usage of uppercase letters in a password. When set to a negative number, any password will be required to
contain that many uppercase characters. When set to a positive number, pam_pwquality will grant +1 additional
length credit for each uppercase character. Modify the ucredit setting in
/etc/security/pwquality.conf to require the use of an uppercase character in passwords. | Rationale: | Use of a complex password helps to increase the time and resources required to compromise the password.
Password complexity, or strength, is a measure of the effectiveness of a password in resisting attempts
at guessing and brute-force attacks.
Password complexity is one factor of several that determines how long it takes to crack a password. The more
complex the password, the greater the number of possible combinations that need to be tested before
the password is compromised. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_pam_ucredit | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R18), 1, 12, 15, 16, 5, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, CCI-000192, CCI-000193, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, 0421, 0422, 0431, 0974, 1173, 1401, 1504, 1505, 1546, 1557, 1558, 1559, 1560, 1561, A.18.1.4, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, IA-5(c), IA-5(1)(a), CM-6(a), IA-5(4), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, FMT_SMF_EXT.1, Req-8.2.3, 8.3.6, 8.3.9, SRG-OS-000069-GPOS-00037, SRG-OS-000070-GPOS-00038, UBTU-20-010050, 5.3.1 | |
|
Rule
Install pam_pwquality Package
[ref] |
The libpam-pwquality package can be installed with the following command:
$ apt-get install libpam-pwquality | Rationale: | Use of a complex password helps to increase the time and resources required
to compromise the password. Password complexity, or strength, is a measure
of the effectiveness of a password in resisting attempts at guessing and
brute-force attacks. "pwquality" enforces complex password construction
configuration and has the ability to limit brute-force attacks on the system. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_pam_pwquality_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000366, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00225, UBTU-20-010057, 5.3.1 | |
|
Group
Protect Accounts by Restricting Password-Based Login
Group contains 4 groups and 23 rules |
[ref]
Conventionally, Unix shell accounts are accessed by
providing a username and password to a login program, which tests
these values for correctness using the /etc/passwd and
/etc/shadow files. Password-based login is vulnerable to
guessing of weak passwords, and to sniffing and man-in-the-middle
attacks against passwords entered over a network or at an insecure
console. Therefore, mechanisms for accessing accounts by entering
usernames and passwords should be restricted to those which are
operationally necessary. |
Group
Set Account Expiration Parameters
Group contains 3 rules |
[ref]
Accounts can be configured to be automatically disabled
after a certain time period,
meaning that they will require administrator interaction to become usable again.
Expiration of accounts after inactivity can be set for all accounts by default
and also on a per-account basis, such as for accounts that are known to be temporary.
To configure automatic expiration of an account following
the expiration of its password (that is, after the password has expired and not been changed),
run the following command, substituting NUM_DAYS and USER appropriately:
$ sudo chage -I NUM_DAYS USER
Accounts, such as temporary accounts, can also be configured to expire on an explicitly-set date with the
-E option.
The file /etc/default/useradd controls
default settings for all newly-created accounts created with the system's
normal command line utilities. Warning:
This will only apply to newly created accounts |
Rule
Set Account Expiration Following Inactivity
[ref] | To specify the number of days after a password expires (which
signifies inactivity) until an account is permanently disabled, add or correct
the following line in /etc/default/useradd :
INACTIVE=30
If a password is currently on the verge of expiration, then
30
day(s) remain(s) until the account is automatically
disabled. However, if the password will not expire for another 60 days, then 60
days plus 30 day(s) could
elapse until the account would be automatically disabled. See the
useradd man page for more information. | Rationale: | Inactive identifiers pose a risk to systems and applications because attackers may exploit an inactive identifier and potentially obtain undetected access to the system.
Disabling inactive accounts ensures that accounts which may not have been responsibly removed are not available to attackers who may have compromised their credentials.
Owners of inactive accounts will not notice if unauthorized access to their user account has been obtained. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_account_disable_post_pw_expiration | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 7, 8, 5.6.2.1.1, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.5.6, CCI-000017, CCI-000795, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 6.2, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.3, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-004-6 R2.2.2, CIP-004-6 R2.2.3, CIP-007-3 R.1.3, CIP-007-3 R5, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.3, CIP-007-3 R5.2.1, CIP-007-3 R5.2.3, IA-4(e), AC-2(3), CM-6(a), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, Req-8.1.4, 8.2.6, SRG-OS-000118-GPOS-00060, UBTU-20-010409, 5.4.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Ensure All Accounts on the System Have Unique Names
[ref] | Ensure accounts on the system have unique names.
To ensure all accounts have unique names, run the following command:
$ sudo getent passwd | awk -F: '{ print $1}' | uniq -d
If a username is returned, change or delete the username. | Rationale: | Unique usernames allow for accountability on the system. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_account_unique_name | Identifiers and References | References:
5.5.2, CCI-000770, CCI-000804, Req-8.1.1, 8.2.1, 6.2.15 | |
|
Rule
Ensure shadow Group is Empty
[ref] | The shadow group allows system programs which require access the ability
to read the /etc/shadow file. No users should be assigned to the shadow group. Warning:
This rule remediation will ensure the group membership is empty in /etc/group. To avoid any
disruption the remediation won't change the primary group of users in /etc/passwd if any
user has the shadow GID as primary group. | Rationale: | Any users assigned to the shadow group would be granted read access to the
/etc/shadow file. If attackers can gain read access to the /etc/shadow file,
they can easily run a password cracking program against the hashed passwords
to break them. Other security information that is stored in the /etc/shadow
file (such as expiration) could also be useful to subvert additional user
accounts. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_ensure_shadow_group_empty | Identifiers and References | References:
Req-8.2.1, 8.3.2, 6.2.17 | |
|
Group
Set Password Expiration Parameters
Group contains 5 rules |
[ref]
The file /etc/login.defs controls several
password-related settings. Programs such as passwd ,
su , and
login consult /etc/login.defs to determine
behavior with regard to password aging, expiration warnings,
and length. See the man page login.defs(5) for more information.
Users should be forced to change their passwords, in order to
decrease the utility of compromised passwords. However, the need to
change passwords often should be balanced against the risk that
users will reuse or write down passwords if forced to change them
too often. Forcing password changes every 90-360 days, depending on
the environment, is recommended. Set the appropriate value as
PASS_MAX_DAYS and apply it to existing accounts with the
-M flag.
The PASS_MIN_DAYS ( -m ) setting prevents password
changes for 7 days after the first change, to discourage password
cycling. If you use this setting, train users to contact an administrator
for an emergency password change in case a new password becomes
compromised. The PASS_WARN_AGE ( -W ) setting gives
users 7 days of warnings at login time that their passwords are about to expire.
For example, for each existing human user USER, expiration parameters
could be adjusted to a 180 day maximum password age, 7 day minimum password
age, and 7 day warning period with the following command:
$ sudo chage -M 180 -m 7 -W 7 USER |
Rule
Set Password Maximum Age
[ref] | To specify password maximum age for new accounts,
edit the file /etc/login.defs
and add or correct the following line:
PASS_MAX_DAYS 365
A value of 180 days is sufficient for many environments.
The DoD requirement is 60.
The profile requirement is 365 . | Rationale: | Any password, no matter how complex, can eventually be cracked. Therefore, passwords
need to be changed periodically. If the operating system does not limit the lifetime
of passwords and force users to change their passwords, there is the risk that the
operating system passwords could be compromised.
Setting the password maximum age ensures users are required to
periodically change their passwords. Requiring shorter password lifetimes
increases the risk of users writing down the password in a convenient
location subject to physical compromise. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_maximum_age_login_defs | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R18), 1, 12, 15, 16, 5, 5.6.2.1, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.5.6, CCI-000199, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, 0418, 1055, 1402, A.18.1.4, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, IA-5(f), IA-5(1)(d), CM-6(a), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, Req-8.2.4, 8.3.10.1, SRG-OS-000076-GPOS-00044, UBTU-20-010008, 5.4.1.1 | |
|
Rule
Set Password Minimum Age
[ref] | To specify password minimum age for new accounts,
edit the file /etc/login.defs
and add or correct the following line:
PASS_MIN_DAYS 1
A value of 1 day is considered sufficient for many
environments. The DoD requirement is 1.
The profile requirement is 1 . | Rationale: | Enforcing a minimum password lifetime helps to prevent repeated password
changes to defeat the password reuse or history enforcement requirement. If
users are allowed to immediately and continually change their password,
then the password could be repeatedly changed in a short period of time to
defeat the organization's policy regarding password reuse.
Setting the minimum password age protects against users cycling back to a
favorite password after satisfying the password reuse requirement. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_minimum_age_login_defs | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 15, 16, 5, 5.6.2.1.1, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.5.8, CCI-000198, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, 0418, 1055, 1402, A.18.1.4, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, IA-5(f), IA-5(1)(d), CM-6(a), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, 8.3.9, SRG-OS-000075-GPOS-00043, UBTU-20-010007, 5.4.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Set Existing Passwords Maximum Age
[ref] | Configure non-compliant accounts to enforce a 365-day maximum password lifetime
restriction by running the following command:
$ sudo chage -M 365 USER | Rationale: | Any password, no matter how complex, can eventually be cracked. Therefore,
passwords need to be changed periodically. If the operating system does
not limit the lifetime of passwords and force users to change their
passwords, there is the risk that the operating system passwords could be
compromised. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_set_max_life_existing | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000199, IA-5(f), IA-5(1)(d), CM-6(a), SRG-OS-000076-GPOS-00044, 5.4.1.1 | |
|
Rule
Set Existing Passwords Minimum Age
[ref] | Configure non-compliant accounts to enforce a 24 hours/1 day minimum password
lifetime by running the following command:
$ sudo chage -m 1 USER | Rationale: | Enforcing a minimum password lifetime helps to prevent repeated password
changes to defeat the password reuse or history enforcement requirement. If
users are allowed to immediately and continually change their password, the
password could be repeatedly changed in a short period of time to defeat the
organization's policy regarding password reuse. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_set_min_life_existing | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000198, IA-5(f), IA-5(1)(d), CM-6(a), SRG-OS-000075-GPOS-00043, 5.4.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Set Password Warning Age
[ref] | To specify how many days prior to password
expiration that a warning will be issued to users,
edit the file /etc/login.defs and add or correct
the following line:
PASS_WARN_AGE 7
The DoD requirement is 7.
The profile requirement is 7 . | Rationale: | Setting the password warning age enables users to
make the change at a practical time. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_warn_age_login_defs | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 7, 8, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.5.8, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 6.2, 0418, 1055, 1402, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.3, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, IA-5(f), IA-5(1)(d), CM-6(a), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, Req-8.2.4, 8.3.9, 5.4.1.3 | |
|
Group
Verify Proper Storage and Existence of Password
Hashes
Group contains 6 rules |
[ref]
By default, password hashes for local accounts are stored
in the second field (colon-separated) in
/etc/shadow . This file should be readable only by
processes running with root credentials, preventing users from
casually accessing others' password hashes and attempting
to crack them.
However, it remains possible to misconfigure the system
and store password hashes
in world-readable files such as /etc/passwd , or
to even store passwords themselves in plaintext on the system.
Using system-provided tools for password change/creation
should allow administrators to avoid such misconfiguration. |
Rule
Verify All Account Password Hashes are Shadowed with SHA512
[ref] | Verify the operating system requires the shadow password suite
configuration be set to encrypt interactive user passwords using a strong
cryptographic hash.
Check that the interactive user account passwords are using a strong
password hash with the following command:
$ sudo cut -d: -f2 /etc/shadow
$6$kcOnRq/5$NUEYPuyL.wghQwWssXRcLRFiiru7f5JPV6GaJhNC2aK5F3PZpE/BCCtwrxRc/AInKMNX3CdMw11m9STiql12f/
Password hashes ! or * indicate inactive accounts not
available for logon and are not evaluated.
If any interactive user password hash does not begin with $6 ,
this is a finding. | Rationale: | Passwords need to be protected at all times, and encryption is the standard method for
protecting passwords. If passwords are not encrypted, they can be plainly read
(i.e., clear text) and easily compromised. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_all_shadowed_sha512 | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000196, CCI-000803, IA-5(1)(c), IA-5(1).1(v), IA-7, IA-7.1, SRG-OS-000073-GPOS-00041, SRG-OS-000120-GPOS-00061, 5.3.4 | |
|
Rule
Ensure all users last password change date is in the past
[ref] | All users should have a password change date in the past. Warning:
Automatic remediation is not available, in order to avoid any system disruption. | Rationale: | If a user recorded password change date is in the future then they could
bypass any set password expiration. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_password_last_change_is_in_past | Identifiers and References | References:
5.4.1.5 | |
|
Rule
All GIDs referenced in /etc/passwd must be defined in /etc/group
[ref] | Add a group to the system for each GID referenced without a corresponding group. | Rationale: | If a user is assigned the Group Identifier (GID) of a group not existing on the system, and a group
with the Group Identifier (GID) is subsequently created, the user may have unintended rights to
any files associated with the group. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_gid_passwd_group_same | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 15, 16, 5, 5.5.2, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, CCI-000764, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, A.18.1.4, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.2.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CIP-007-3 R5.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.1, CIP-007-3 R5.3.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.3, IA-2, CM-6(a), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, Req-8.5.a, 8.2.2, SRG-OS-000104-GPOS-00051, 6.2.12 | |
|
Rule
Prevent Login to Accounts With Empty Password
[ref] | If an account is configured for password authentication
but does not have an assigned password, it may be possible to log
into the account without authentication. Remove any instances of the
nullok in
/etc/pam.d/system-auth and
/etc/pam.d/password-auth
to prevent logins with empty passwords. Warning:
If the system relies on authselect tool to manage PAM settings, the remediation
will also use authselect tool. However, if any manual modification was made in
PAM files, the authselect integrity check will fail and the remediation will be
aborted in order to preserve intentional changes. In this case, an informative message will
be shown in the remediation report.
Note that this rule is not applicable for systems running within a
container. Having user with empty password within a container is not
considered a risk, because it should not be possible to directly login into
a container anyway. | Rationale: | If an account has an empty password, anyone could log in and
run commands with the privileges of that account. Accounts with
empty passwords should never be used in operational environments. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_no_empty_passwords | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.02, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.1.1, 3.1.5, CCI-000366, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(7)(i), 164.308(a)(7)(ii)(A), 164.310(a)(1), 164.310(a)(2)(i), 164.310(a)(2)(ii), 164.310(a)(2)(iii), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, IA-5(1)(a), IA-5(c), CM-6(a), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.DS-5, FIA_UAU.1, Req-8.2.3, 8.3.6, 8.3.9, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.2.1 | |
|
Rule
Verify No .forward Files Exist
[ref] | The .forward file specifies an email address to forward the user's mail to. | Rationale: | Use of the .forward file poses a security risk in that sensitive data may
be inadvertently transferred outside the organization. The .forward file
also poses a risk as it can be used to execute commands that may perform
unintended actions. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_no_forward_files | Identifiers and References | References:
6.2.8 | |
|
Rule
Verify No netrc Files Exist
[ref] | The .netrc files contain login information
used to auto-login into FTP servers and reside in the user's home
directory. These files may contain unencrypted passwords to
remote FTP servers making them susceptible to access by unauthorized
users and should not be used. Any .netrc files should be removed. | Rationale: | Unencrypted passwords for remote FTP servers may be stored in .netrc
files. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_no_netrc_files | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, DSS06.10, CCI-000196, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R1.3, CIP-003-8 R3, CIP-003-8 R3.1, CIP-003-8 R3.2, CIP-003-8 R3.3, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.2.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CIP-007-3 R5.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.1, CIP-007-3 R5.3.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.3, IA-5(h), IA-5(1)(c), CM-6(a), IA-5(7), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.PT-3, 6.2.9 | |
|
Group
Restrict Root Logins
Group contains 6 rules |
[ref]
Direct root logins should be allowed only for emergency use.
In normal situations, the administrator should access the system
via a unique unprivileged account, and then use su or sudo to execute
privileged commands. Discouraging administrators from accessing the
root account directly ensures an audit trail in organizations with
multiple administrators. Locking down the channels through which
root can connect directly also reduces opportunities for
password-guessing against the root account. The login program
uses the file /etc/securetty to determine which interfaces
should allow root logins.
The virtual devices /dev/console
and /dev/tty* represent the system consoles (accessible via
the Ctrl-Alt-F1 through Ctrl-Alt-F6 keyboard sequences on a default
installation). The default securetty file also contains /dev/vc/* .
These are likely to be deprecated in most environments, but may be retained
for compatibility. Root should also be prohibited from connecting
via network protocols. Other sections of this document
include guidance describing how to prevent root from logging in via SSH. |
Rule
Verify Only Root Has UID 0
[ref] | If any account other than root has a UID of 0, this misconfiguration should
be investigated and the accounts other than root should be removed or have
their UID changed.
If the account is associated with system commands or applications the UID
should be changed to one greater than "0" but less than "1000."
Otherwise assign a UID greater than "1000" that has not already been
assigned. | Rationale: | An account has root authority if it has a UID of 0. Multiple accounts
with a UID of 0 afford more opportunity for potential intruders to
guess a password for a privileged account. Proper configuration of
sudo is recommended to afford multiple system administrators
access to root privileges in an accountable manner. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_no_uid_except_zero | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.02, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.1.1, 3.1.5, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.2.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CIP-007-3 R5.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.1, CIP-007-3 R5.3.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.3, IA-2, AC-6(5), IA-4(b), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.DS-5, Req-8.5, 8.2.2, 8.2.3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.2.2 | |
|
Rule
Verify Root Has A Primary GID 0
[ref] | The root user should have a primary group of 0. | Rationale: | To help ensure that root-owned files are not inadvertently exposed to other users. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_root_gid_zero | Identifiers and References | References:
Req-8.1.1, 8.2.1, 5.4.3 | |
|
Rule
Ensure the Group Used by pam_wheel Module Exists on System and is Empty
[ref] | Ensure that the group sugroup
referenced by the pam_wheel group parameter exists and has no
members. This ensures that no user can run commands with altered
privileges through the su command. | Rationale: | The su program allows to run commands with a substitute user and
group ID. It is commonly used to run commands as the root user. Limiting
access to such command is considered a good security practice. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_ensure_pam_wheel_group_empty | Identifiers and References | References:
5.6 | |
|
Rule
Ensure Authentication Required for Single User Mode
[ref] | Single user mode is used for recovery when the system detects an
issue during boot or by manual selection from the bootloader. | Rationale: | Requiring authentication in single user mode prevents an unauthorized
user from rebooting the system into single user to gain root privileges
without credentials. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_ensure_root_password_configured | Identifiers and References | References:
1.5.3 | |
|
Rule
Ensure that System Accounts Do Not Run a Shell Upon Login
[ref] | Some accounts are not associated with a human user of the system, and exist to perform some
administrative functions. Should an attacker be able to log into these accounts, they should
not be granted access to a shell.
The login shell for each local account is stored in the last field of each line in
/etc/passwd . System accounts are those user accounts with a user ID less than
1000 . The user ID is stored in the third field. If any system account
other than root has a login shell, disable it with the command:
$ sudo usermod -s /sbin/nologin account Warning:
Do not perform the steps in this section on the root account. Doing so might cause the
system to become inaccessible. | Rationale: | Ensuring shells are not given to system accounts upon login makes it more difficult for
attackers to make use of system accounts. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_no_shelllogin_for_systemaccounts | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 7, 8, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.03, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 6.2, 1491, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-6, CM-6(a), CM-6(b), CM-6.1(iv), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, 8.6.1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.4.2 | |
|
Rule
Enforce Usage of pam_wheel with Group Parameter for su Authentication
[ref] | To ensure that only users who are members of the group set in the
group pam_wheel parameter can run commands with altered
privileges through the su command, make sure that the
following line exists in the file /etc/pam.d/su :
auth required pam_wheel.so use_uid group=sugroup | Rationale: | The su program allows to run commands with a substitute
user and group ID. It is commonly used to run commands as the root
user. Limiting access to such command is considered a good security
practice. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_use_pam_wheel_group_for_su | Identifiers and References | References:
5.6 | |
|
Rule
Ensure All Accounts on the System Have Unique User IDs
[ref] | Change user IDs (UIDs), or delete accounts, so each has a unique name. Warning:
Automatic remediation of this control is not available due to unique requirements of each
system. | Rationale: | To assure accountability and prevent unauthenticated access, interactive users must be identified and authenticated to prevent potential misuse and compromise of the system. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_account_unique_id | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000135, CCI-000764, CCI-000804, Req-8.1.1, 8.2.1, SRG-OS-000104-GPOS-00051, SRG-OS-000121-GPOS-00062, SRG-OS-000042-GPOS-00020, 6.2.13 | |
|
Rule
Ensure All Groups on the System Have Unique Group ID
[ref] | Change the group name or delete groups, so each has a unique id. Warning:
Automatic remediation of this control is not available due to the unique requirements of each system. | Rationale: | To assure accountability and prevent unauthenticated access, groups must be identified uniquely to prevent potential misuse and compromise of the system. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_group_unique_id | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000764, 8.2.1, SRG-OS-000104-GPOS-00051, 6.2.14 | |
|
Rule
Ensure All Groups on the System Have Unique Group Names
[ref] | Change the group name or delete groups, so each has a unique name. Warning:
Automatic remediation of this control is not available due to the unique requirements of each system. | Rationale: | To assure accountability and prevent unauthenticated access, groups must be identified uniquely to prevent potential misuse and compromise of the system. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_group_unique_name | Identifiers and References | References:
8.2.1, 6.2.16 | |
|
Group
Secure Session Configuration Files for Login Accounts
Group contains 2 groups and 13 rules |
[ref]
When a user logs into a Unix account, the system
configures the user's session by reading a number of files. Many of
these files are located in the user's home directory, and may have
weak permissions as a result of user error or misconfiguration. If
an attacker can modify or even read certain types of account
configuration information, they can often gain full access to the
affected user's account. Therefore, it is important to test and
correct configuration file permissions for interactive accounts,
particularly those of privileged users such as root or system
administrators. |
Group
Ensure that No Dangerous Directories Exist in Root's Path
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The active path of the root account can be obtained by
starting a new root shell and running:
# echo $PATH
This will produce a colon-separated list of
directories in the path.
Certain path elements could be considered dangerous, as they could lead
to root executing unknown or
untrusted programs, which could contain malicious
code.
Since root may sometimes work inside
untrusted directories, the . character, which represents the
current directory, should never be in the root path, nor should any
directory which can be written to by an unprivileged or
semi-privileged (system) user.
It is a good practice for administrators to always execute
privileged commands by typing the full path to the
command. |
Rule
Ensure that Root's Path Does Not Include World or Group-Writable Directories
[ref] | For each element in root's path, run:
# ls -ld DIR
and ensure that write permissions are disabled for group and
other. | Rationale: | Such entries increase the risk that root could
execute code provided by unprivileged users,
and potentially malicious code. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_root_path_dirs_no_write | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, CCI-000366, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, CM-6(a), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, 6.2.3 | |
|
Group
Ensure that Users Have Sensible Umask Values
Group contains 5 rules |
[ref]
The umask setting controls the default permissions
for the creation of new files.
With a default umask setting of 077, files and directories
created by users will not be readable by any other user on the
system. Users who wish to make specific files group- or
world-readable can accomplish this by using the chmod command.
Additionally, users can make all their files readable to their
group by default by setting a umask of 027 in their shell
configuration files. If default per-user groups exist (that is, if
every user has a default group whose name is the same as that
user's username and whose only member is the user), then it may
even be safe for users to select a umask of 007, making it very
easy to intentionally share files with groups of which the user is
a member.
|
Rule
Ensure the Default Bash Umask is Set Correctly
[ref] | To ensure the default umask for users of the Bash shell is set properly,
add or correct the umask setting in /etc/bashrc to read
as follows:
umask 027 | Rationale: | The umask value influences the permissions assigned to files when they are created.
A misconfigured umask value could result in files with excessive permissions that can be read or
written to by unauthorized users. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_umask_etc_bashrc | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R35), 18, APO13.01, BAI03.01, BAI03.02, BAI03.03, CCI-000366, 4.3.4.3.3, A.14.1.1, A.14.2.1, A.14.2.5, A.6.1.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, AC-6(1), CM-6(a), PR.IP-2, 8.6.1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00228, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.4.4 | |
|
Rule
Ensure the Default C Shell Umask is Set Correctly
[ref] | To ensure the default umask for users of the C shell is set properly,
add or correct the umask setting in /etc/csh.cshrc to read as follows:
umask 027 | Rationale: | The umask value influences the permissions assigned to files when they are created.
A misconfigured umask value could result in files with excessive permissions that can be read or
written to by unauthorized users. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_umask_etc_csh_cshrc | Identifiers and References | References:
18, APO13.01, BAI03.01, BAI03.02, BAI03.03, CCI-000366, 4.3.4.3.3, A.14.1.1, A.14.2.1, A.14.2.5, A.6.1.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, AC-6(1), CM-6(a), PR.IP-2, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00228, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.4.4 | |
|
Rule
Ensure the Default Umask is Set Correctly in login.defs
[ref] | To ensure the default umask controlled by /etc/login.defs is set properly,
add or correct the UMASK setting in /etc/login.defs to read as follows:
UMASK 027 | Rationale: | The umask value influences the permissions assigned to files when they are created.
A misconfigured umask value could result in files with excessive permissions that can be read and
written to by unauthorized users. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_umask_etc_login_defs | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R35), 11, 18, 3, 9, APO13.01, BAI03.01, BAI03.02, BAI03.03, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, CCI-000366, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.1.1, A.14.2.1, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.14.2.5, A.6.1.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, AC-6(1), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.IP-2, 8.6.1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00228, UBTU-20-010016, 5.4.4 | |
|
Rule
Ensure the Default Umask is Set Correctly in /etc/profile
[ref] | To ensure the default umask controlled by /etc/profile is set properly,
add or correct the umask setting in /etc/profile to read as follows:
umask 027
Note that /etc/profile also reads scrips within /etc/profile.d directory.
These scripts are also valid files to set umask value. Therefore, they should also be
considered during the check and properly remediated, if necessary. | Rationale: | The umask value influences the permissions assigned to files when they are created.
A misconfigured umask value could result in files with excessive permissions that can be read or
written to by unauthorized users. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_umask_etc_profile | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R35), 18, APO13.01, BAI03.01, BAI03.02, BAI03.03, CCI-000366, 4.3.4.3.3, A.14.1.1, A.14.2.1, A.14.2.5, A.6.1.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, AC-6(1), CM-6(a), PR.IP-2, 8.6.1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00228, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.4.4 | |
|
Rule
Ensure the Default Umask is Set Correctly For Interactive Users
[ref] | Remove the UMASK environment variable from all interactive users initialization files. | Rationale: | The umask controls the default access mode assigned to newly created files. A
umask of 077 limits new files to mode 700 or less permissive. Although umask can
be represented as a four-digit number, the first digit representing special
access modes is typically ignored or required to be 0. This requirement
applies to the globally configured system defaults and the local interactive
user defaults for each account on the system. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_umask_interactive_users | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000366, CCI-001814, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00228, 5.4.4 | |
|
Rule
Set Interactive Session Timeout
[ref] | Setting the TMOUT option in /etc/profile ensures that
all user sessions will terminate based on inactivity.
The value of TMOUT should be exported and read only.
The TMOUT
setting in a file loaded by /etc/profile , e.g.
/etc/profile.d/tmout.sh should read as follows:
TMOUT=900
readonly TMOUT
export TMOUT | Rationale: | Terminating an idle session within a short time period reduces
the window of opportunity for unauthorized personnel to take control of a
management session enabled on the console or console port that has been
left unattended. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_tmout | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R29), 1, 12, 15, 16, DSS05.04, DSS05.10, DSS06.10, 3.1.11, CCI-000057, CCI-001133, CCI-002361, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, A.18.1.4, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.4, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, CIP-004-6 R2.2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.1, CIP-007-3 R5.3.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.3, AC-12, SC-10, AC-2(5), CM-6(a), PR.AC-7, FMT_MOF_EXT.1, 8.6.1, SRG-OS-000163-GPOS-00072, SRG-OS-000029-GPOS-00010, UBTU-20-010013, 5.4.5 | |
|
Rule
User Initialization Files Must Be Group-Owned By The Primary Group
[ref] | Change the group owner of interactive users files to the group found
in /etc/passwd for the user. To change the group owner of a local
interactive user home directory, use the following command:
$ sudo chgrp USER_GROUP /home/USER/.INIT_FILE
This rule ensures every initialization file related to an interactive user
is group-owned by an interactive user. Warning:
Due to OVAL limitation, this rule can report a false negative in a
specific situation where two interactive users swap the group-ownership
of their respective initialization files. | Rationale: | Local initialization files for interactive users are used to configure the
user's shell environment upon logon. Malicious modification of these files could
compromise accounts upon logon. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_user_dot_group_ownership | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000366, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.2.7 | |
|
Rule
User Initialization Files Must Be Owned By the Primary User
[ref] | Set the owner of the user initialization files for interactive users to
the primary owner with the following command:
$ sudo chown USER /home/USER/.*
This rule ensures every initialization file related to an interactive user
is owned by an interactive user. Warning:
Due to OVAL limitation, this rule can report a false negative in a
specific situation where two interactive users swap the ownership of
their respective initialization files. | Rationale: | Local initialization files are used to configure the user's shell environment
upon logon. Malicious modification of these files could compromise accounts upon
logon. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_user_dot_user_ownership | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000366, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.2.7 | |
|
Rule
All Interactive Users Home Directories Must Exist
[ref] | Create home directories to all interactive users that currently do not
have a home directory assigned. Use the following commands to create the user
home directory assigned in /etc/passwd :
$ sudo mkdir /home/USER | Rationale: | If a local interactive user has a home directory defined that does not exist,
the user may be given access to the / directory as the current working directory
upon logon. This could create a Denial of Service because the user would not be
able to access their logon configuration files, and it may give them visibility
to system files they normally would not be able to access. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_accounts_user_interactive_home_directory_exists | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000366, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.2.4 | |
|
Rule
All Interactive User Home Directories Must Be Group-Owned By The Primary Group
[ref] | Change the group owner of interactive users home directory to the
group found in /etc/passwd . To change the group owner of
interactive users home directory, use the following command:
$ sudo chgrp USER_GROUP /home/USER
This rule ensures every home directory related to an interactive user is
group-owned by an interactive user. It also ensures that interactive users
are group-owners of one and only one home directory. Warning:
Due to OVAL limitation, this rule can report a false negative in a
specific situation where two interactive users swap the group-ownership
of their respective home directories. | Rationale: | If the Group Identifier (GID) of a local interactive users home directory is
not the same as the primary GID of the user, this would allow unauthorized
access to the users files, and users that share the same group may not be
able to access files that they legitimately should. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupownership_home_directories | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000366, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.2.6 | |
|
Rule
All Interactive User Home Directories Must Be Owned By The Primary User
[ref] | Change the owner of interactive users home directories to that correct
owner. To change the owner of a interactive users home directory, use
the following command:
$ sudo chown USER /home/USER
This rule ensures every home directory related to an interactive user is
owned by an interactive user. It also ensures that interactive users are
owners of one and only one home directory. Warning:
Due to OVAL limitation, this rule can report a false negative in a
specific situation where two interactive users swap the ownership of
their respective home directories. | Rationale: | If a local interactive user does not own their home directory, unauthorized
users could access or modify the user's files, and the users may not be able to
access their own files. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_ownership_home_directories | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000366, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.2.6 | |
|
Rule
All Interactive User Home Directories Must Have mode 0750 Or Less Permissive
[ref] | Change the mode of interactive users home directories to 0750 . To
change the mode of interactive users home directory, use the
following command:
$ sudo chmod 0750 /home/USER | Rationale: | Excessive permissions on local interactive user home directories may allow
unauthorized access to user files by other users. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_home_directories | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000366, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.2.5 | |
|
Group
AppArmor
Group contains 3 rules |
[ref]
Many security vulnerabilities result from bugs in trusted programs. A trusted
program runs with privileges that attackers want to possess. The program fails
to keep that trust if there is a bug in the program that allows the attacker to
acquire said privilege.
AppArmor® is an application security solution designed specifically to apply
privilege confinement to suspect programs. AppArmor allows the administrator to
specify the domain of activities the program can perform by developing a
security profile. A security profile is a listing of files that the program may
access and the operations the program may perform. AppArmor secures
applications by enforcing good application behavior without relying on attack
signatures, so it can prevent attacks even if previously unknown
vulnerabilities are being exploited. |
Rule
Ensure AppArmor is installed
[ref] | AppArmor provide Mandatory Access Controls. | Rationale: | Without a Mandatory Access Control system installed only the default
Discretionary Access Control system will be available. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_apparmor_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-001764, CCI-001774, CCI-002165, CCI-002235, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154, SRG-OS-000312-GPOS-00122, SRG-OS-000312-GPOS-00123, SRG-OS-000312-GPOS-00124, SRG-OS-000324-GPOS-00125, SRG-OS-000370-GPOS-00155, UBTU-20-010439, 1.7.1.1 | |
|
Rule
All AppArmor Profiles are in enforce or complain mode
[ref] | AppArmor profiles define what resources applications are able to access.
To set all profiles to either enforce or complain mode
run the following command to set all profiles to enforce mode:
$ sudo aa-enforce /etc/apparmor.d/*
run the following command to set all profiles to complain mode:
$ sudo aa-complain /etc/apparmor.d/*
To list unconfined processes run the following command:
$ sudo apparmor_status | grep processes
Any unconfined processes may need to have a profile created or activated
for them and then be restarted. | Rationale: | Security configuration requirements vary from site to site. Some sites may
mandate a policy that is stricter than the default policy, which is perfectly
acceptable. This recommendation is intended to ensure that any policies that
exist on the system are activated. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_all_apparmor_profiles_in_enforce_complain_mode | Identifiers and References | References:
1.7.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Ensure AppArmor is enabled in the bootloader configuration
[ref] | Configure AppArmor to be enabled at boot time and verify that it has not been
overwritten by the bootloader boot parameters.
Note: This recommendation is designed around the grub bootloader, if LILO or
another bootloader is in use in your environment, enact equivalent settings. | Rationale: | AppArmor must be enabled at boot time in your bootloader configuration to
ensure that the controls it provides are not overridden. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_grub2_enable_apparmor | Identifiers and References | References:
1.7.1.2 | |
|
Group
GRUB2 bootloader configuration
Group contains 2 groups and 4 rules |
[ref]
During the boot process, the boot loader is
responsible for starting the execution of the kernel and passing
options to it. The boot loader allows for the selection of
different kernels - possibly on different partitions or media.
The default Ubuntu 20.04 boot loader for x86 systems is called GRUB2.
Options it can pass to the kernel include single-user mode, which
provides root access without any authentication, and the ability to
disable SELinux. To prevent local users from modifying the boot
parameters and endangering security, protect the boot loader configuration
with a password and ensure its configuration file's permissions
are set properly. |
Group
Non-UEFI GRUB2 bootloader configuration
Group contains 3 rules |
[ref]
Non-UEFI GRUB2 bootloader configuration |
Rule
Verify /boot/grub/grub.cfg User Ownership
[ref] | The file /boot/grub/grub.cfg should
be owned by the root user to prevent destruction
or modification of the file.
To properly set the owner of /boot/grub/grub.cfg , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /boot/grub/grub.cfg | Rationale: | Only root should be able to modify important boot parameters. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_grub2_cfg | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.4.5, CCI-000225, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(7)(i), 164.308(a)(7)(ii)(A), 164.310(a)(1), 164.310(a)(2)(i), 164.310(a)(2)(ii), 164.310(a)(2)(iii), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-7.1, 2.2.6, 1.5.2 | |
|
Rule
Verify /boot/grub/grub.cfg Permissions
[ref] | File permissions for /boot/grub/grub.cfg should be set to 600.
To properly set the permissions of /boot/grub/grub.cfg , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 600 /boot/grub/grub.cfg | Rationale: | Proper permissions ensure that only the root user can modify important boot
parameters. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_grub2_cfg | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.4.5, CCI-000225, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(7)(i), 164.308(a)(7)(ii)(A), 164.310(a)(1), 164.310(a)(2)(i), 164.310(a)(2)(ii), 164.310(a)(2)(iii), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, 1.5.2 | |
|
Rule
Set Boot Loader Password in grub2
[ref] | The grub2 boot loader should have a superuser account and password
protection enabled to protect boot-time settings.
Since plaintext passwords are a security risk, generate a hash for the password
by running the following command:
# grub2-mkpasswd-pbkdf2
When prompted, enter the password that was selected.
Using the hash from the output, modify the /etc/grub.d/40_custom
file with the following content:
set superusers="boot"
password_pbkdf2 boot grub.pbkdf2.sha512.VeryLongString
NOTE: the bootloader superuser account and password MUST differ from the
root account and password.
Once the superuser password has been added,
update the
grub.cfg file by running:
update-grub Warning:
To prevent hard-coded passwords, automatic remediation of this control is not available. Remediation
must be automated as a component of machine provisioning, or followed manually as outlined above.
Also, do NOT manually add the superuser account and password to the
grub.cfg file as the grub2-mkconfig command overwrites this file. | Rationale: | Password protection on the boot loader configuration ensures
users with physical access cannot trivially alter
important bootloader settings. These include which kernel to use,
and whether to enter single-user mode. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_grub2_password | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R17), 1, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, DSS06.10, 3.4.5, CCI-000213, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(7)(i), 164.308(a)(7)(ii)(A), 164.310(a)(1), 164.310(a)(2)(i), 164.310(a)(2)(ii), 164.310(a)(2)(iii), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.PT-3, FIA_UAU.1, SRG-OS-000080-GPOS-00048, UBTU-20-010009, 1.5.1 | |
|
Group
UEFI GRUB2 bootloader configuration
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
UEFI GRUB2 bootloader configuration |
Rule
Set the UEFI Boot Loader Password
[ref] | The grub2 boot loader should have a superuser account and password
protection enabled to protect boot-time settings.
Since plaintext passwords are a security risk, generate a hash for the password
by running the following command:
# grub2-mkpasswd-pbkdf2
When prompted, enter the password that was selected.
Using the hash from the output, modify the /etc/grub.d/40_custom
file with the following content:
set superusers="boot"
password_pbkdf2 boot grub.pbkdf2.sha512.VeryLongString
NOTE: the bootloader superuser account and password MUST differ from the
root account and password.
Once the superuser password has been added,
update the
grub.cfg file by running:
update-grub Warning:
To prevent hard-coded passwords, automatic remediation of this control is not available. Remediation
must be automated as a component of machine provisioning, or followed manually as outlined above.
Also, do NOT manually add the superuser account and password to the
grub.cfg file as the grub2-mkconfig command overwrites this file. | Rationale: | Password protection on the boot loader configuration ensures
users with physical access cannot trivially alter
important bootloader settings. These include which kernel to use,
and whether to enter single-user mode. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_grub2_uefi_password | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R17), 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, 3.4.5, CCI-000213, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(7)(i), 164.308(a)(7)(ii)(A), 164.310(a)(1), 164.310(a)(2)(i), 164.310(a)(2)(ii), 164.310(a)(2)(iii), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.PT-3, FIA_UAU.1, SRG-OS-000080-GPOS-00048, UBTU-20-010009, 1.5.1 | |
|
Group
Configure Syslog
Group contains 2 groups and 7 rules |
[ref]
The syslog service has been the default Unix logging mechanism for
many years. It has a number of downsides, including inconsistent log format,
lack of authentication for received messages, and lack of authentication,
encryption, or reliable transport for messages sent over a network. However,
due to its long history, syslog is a de facto standard which is supported by
almost all Unix applications.
In Ubuntu 20.04, rsyslog has replaced ksyslogd as the
syslog daemon of choice, and it includes some additional security features
such as reliable, connection-oriented (i.e. TCP) transmission of logs, the
option to log to database formats, and the encryption of log data en route to
a central logging server.
This section discusses how to configure rsyslog for
best effect, and how to use tools provided with the system to maintain and
monitor logs. |
Group
systemd-journald
Group contains 3 rules |
[ref]
systemd-journald is a system service that collects and stores
logging data. It creates and maintains structured, indexed
journals based on logging information that is received from a
variety of sources.
For more information on systemd-journald and additional systemd-journald configuration options, see
https://systemd.io/. |
Rule
Ensure journald is configured to compress large log files
[ref] | The journald system can compress large log files to avoid fill the system disk. | Rationale: | Log files that are not properly compressed run the risk of growing so large that they fill up the log partition. Valuable logging information could be lost if the log partition becomes full. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_journald_compress | Identifiers and References | References:
4.2.2.2 | |
|
Rule
Ensure journald is configured to send logs to rsyslog
[ref] | Data from journald may be stored in volatile memory or persisted locally.
Utilities exist to accept remote export of journald logs. | Rationale: | Storing log data on a remote host protects log integrity from local attacks. If an attacker gains root access on the local system, they could tamper with or remove log data that is stored on the local system. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_journald_forward_to_syslog | Identifiers and References | References:
4.2.2.1 | |
|
Rule
Ensure journald is configured to write log files to persistent disk
[ref] | The journald system may store log files in volatile memory or locally on disk.
If the logs are only stored in volatile memory they will we lost upon reboot. | Rationale: | Log files contain valuable data and need to be persistent to aid in possible investigations. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_journald_storage | Identifiers and References | References:
4.2.2.3 | |
|
Group
Rsyslog Logs Sent To Remote Host
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If system logs are to be useful in detecting malicious
activities, it is necessary to send logs to a remote server. An
intruder who has compromised the root account on a system may
delete the log entries which indicate that the system was attacked
before they are seen by an administrator.
However, it is recommended that logs be stored on the local
host in addition to being sent to the loghost, especially if
rsyslog has been configured to use the UDP protocol to send
messages over a network. UDP does not guarantee reliable delivery,
and moderately busy sites will lose log messages occasionally,
especially in periods of high traffic which may be the result of an
attack. In addition, remote rsyslog messages are not
authenticated in any way by default, so it is easy for an attacker to
introduce spurious messages to the central log server. Also, some
problems cause loss of network connectivity, which will prevent the
sending of messages to the central server. For all of these reasons, it is
better to store log messages both centrally and on each host, so
that they can be correlated if necessary. |
Rule
Ensure Logs Sent To Remote Host
[ref] | To configure rsyslog to send logs to a remote log server,
open /etc/rsyslog.conf and read and understand the last section of the file,
which describes the multiple directives necessary to activate remote
logging.
Along with these other directives, the system can be configured
to forward its logs to a particular log server by
adding or correcting one of the following lines,
substituting logcollector appropriately.
The choice of protocol depends on the environment of the system;
although TCP and RELP provide more reliable message delivery,
they may not be supported in all environments.
To use UDP for log message delivery:
*.* @logcollector
To use TCP for log message delivery:
*.* @@logcollector
To use RELP for log message delivery:
*.* :omrelp:logcollector
There must be a resolvable DNS CNAME or Alias record set to " logcollector" for logs to be sent correctly to the centralized logging utility. Warning:
It is important to configure queues in case the client is sending log
messages to a remote server. If queues are not configured,
the system will stop functioning when the connection
to the remote server is not available. Please consult Rsyslog
documentation for more information about configuration of queues. The
example configuration which should go into /etc/rsyslog.conf
can look like the following lines:
$ActionQueueType LinkedList
$ActionQueueFileName queuefilename
$ActionQueueMaxDiskSpace 1g
$ActionQueueSaveOnShutdown on
$ActionResumeRetryCount -1
| Rationale: | A log server (loghost) receives syslog messages from one or more
systems. This data can be used as an additional log source in the event a
system is compromised and its local logs are suspect. Forwarding log messages
to a remote loghost also provides system administrators with a centralized
place to view the status of multiple hosts within the enterprise. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_rsyslog_remote_loghost | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R7), NT28(R43), NT12(R5), 1, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 5, 6, APO11.04, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI04.04, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, CCI-000366, CCI-001348, CCI-000136, CCI-001851, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.308(a)(6)(ii), 164.308(a)(8), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 164.312(b), 164.314(a)(2)(i)(C), 164.314(a)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, 0988, 1405, A.12.1.3, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.17.2.1, CIP-003-8 R5.2, CIP-004-6 R3.3, CM-6(a), AU-4(1), AU-9(2), PR.DS-4, PR.PT-1, FAU_GEN.1.1.c, SRG-OS-000479-GPOS-00224, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000342-GPOS-00133, 4.2.1.5 | |
|
Rule
Ensure rsyslog is Installed
[ref] | Rsyslog is installed by default. The rsyslog package can be installed with the following command: $ apt-get install rsyslog | Rationale: | The rsyslog package provides the rsyslog daemon, which provides
system logging services. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_rsyslog_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 14, 15, 16, 3, 5, 6, APO11.04, BAI03.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, CCI-001311, CCI-001312, CCI-000366, 164.312(a)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, CM-6(a), PR.PT-1, FTP_ITC_EXT.1.1, SRG-OS-000479-GPOS-00224, SRG-OS-000051-GPOS-00024, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 4.2.1.1 | |
|
Rule
Enable rsyslog Service
[ref] | The rsyslog service provides syslog-style logging by default on Ubuntu 20.04.
The rsyslog service can be enabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl enable rsyslog.service | Rationale: | The rsyslog service must be running in order to provide
logging services, which are essential to system administration. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_rsyslog_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI04.04, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, CCI-001311, CCI-001312, CCI-001557, CCI-001851, CCI-000366, 164.312(a)(2)(ii), 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.17.2.1, CM-6(a), AU-4(1), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.DS-4, PR.PT-1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, UBTU-20-010432, 4.2.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Ensure rsyslog Default File Permissions Configured
[ref] | rsyslog will create logfiles that do not already exist on the system.
This settings controls what permissions will be applied to these newly
created files. | Rationale: | It is important to ensure that log files have the correct permissions
to ensure that sensitive data is archived and protected. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_rsyslog_filecreatemode | Identifiers and References | References:
4.2.1.4 | |
|
Group
Network Configuration and Firewalls
Group contains 12 groups and 45 rules |
[ref]
Most systems must be connected to a network of some
sort, and this brings with it the substantial risk of network
attack. This section discusses the security impact of decisions
about networking which must be made when configuring a system.
This section also discusses firewalls, network access
controls, and other network security frameworks, which allow
system-level rules to be written that can limit an attackers' ability
to connect to your system. These rules can specify that network
traffic should be allowed or denied from certain IP addresses,
hosts, and networks. The rules can also specify which of the
system's network services are available to particular hosts or
networks. |
Group
iptables and ip6tables
Group contains 2 groups and 7 rules |
[ref]
A host-based firewall called netfilter is included as
part of the Linux kernel distributed with the system. It is
activated by default. This firewall is controlled by the program
iptables , and the entire capability is frequently referred to by
this name. An analogous program called ip6tables handles filtering
for IPv6.
Unlike TCP Wrappers, which depends on the network server
program to support and respect the rules written, netfilter
filtering occurs at the kernel level, before a program can even
process the data from the network packet. As such, any program on
the system is affected by the rules written.
This section provides basic information about strengthening
the iptables and ip6tables configurations included with the system.
For more complete information that may allow the construction of a
sophisticated ruleset tailored to your environment, please consult
the references at the end of this section. |
Group
Inspect and Activate Default Rules
Group contains 3 rules |
[ref]
View the currently-enforced iptables rules by running
the command:
$ sudo iptables -nL --line-numbers
The command is analogous for ip6tables .
If the firewall does not appear to be active (i.e., no rules
appear), activate it and ensure that it starts at boot by issuing
the following commands (and analogously for ip6tables ):
$ sudo service iptables restart
The default iptables rules are:
Chain INPUT (policy ACCEPT)
num target prot opt source destination
1 ACCEPT all -- 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 state RELATED,ESTABLISHED
2 ACCEPT icmp -- 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0
3 ACCEPT all -- 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0
4 ACCEPT tcp -- 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 state NEW tcp dpt:22
5 REJECT all -- 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 reject-with icmp-host-prohibited
Chain FORWARD (policy ACCEPT)
num target prot opt source destination
1 REJECT all -- 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 reject-with icmp-host-prohibited
Chain OUTPUT (policy ACCEPT)
num target prot opt source destination
The ip6tables default rules are essentially the same. |
Rule
Set Default ip6tables Policy for Incoming Packets
[ref] | To set the default policy to DROP (instead of ACCEPT) for
the built-in INPUT chain which processes incoming packets,
add or correct the following line in
/etc/sysconfig/ip6tables :
:INPUT DROP [0:0]
If changes were required, reload the ip6tables rules:
$ sudo service ip6tables reload | Rationale: | In ip6tables , the default policy is applied only after all
the applicable rules in the table are examined for a match. Setting the
default policy to DROP implements proper design for a firewall, i.e.
any packets which are not explicitly permitted should not be
accepted. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_set_ip6tables_default_rule | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CIP-003-8 R4, CIP-003-8 R5, CIP-004-6 R3, AC-4, CM-7(b), CA-3(5), SC-7(21), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 1.4.1, 3.5.3.3.1 | |
|
Rule
Set configuration for IPv6 loopback traffic
[ref] | Configure the loopback interface to accept traffic.
Configure all other interfaces to deny traffic to the loopback
network. Warning:
Changing firewall settings while connected over network can
result in being locked out of the system. | Rationale: | Loopback traffic is generated between processes on machine and is
typically critical to operation of the system. The loopback interface
is the only place that loopback network traffic should be seen,
all other interfaces should ignore traffic on this network as an
anti-spoofing measure. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_set_ipv6_loopback_traffic | Identifiers and References | References:
Req-1.3, 1.4.1, 3.5.3.3.2 | |
|
Rule
Set configuration for loopback traffic
[ref] | Configure the loopback interface to accept traffic.
Configure all other interfaces to deny traffic to the loopback
network. Warning:
Changing firewall settings while connected over network can
result in being locked out of the system. | Rationale: | Loopback traffic is generated between processes on machine and is
typically critical to operation of the system. The loopback interface
is the only place that loopback network traffic should be seen, all
other interfaces should ignore traffic on this network as an
anti-spoofing measure. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_set_loopback_traffic | Identifiers and References | References:
Req-1.3, 1.4.1, 3.5.3.2.2 | |
|
Group
Strengthen the Default Ruleset
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The default rules can be strengthened. The system
scripts that activate the firewall rules expect them to be defined
in the configuration files iptables and ip6tables in the directory
/etc/sysconfig . Many of the lines in these files are similar
to the command line arguments that would be provided to the programs
/sbin/iptables or /sbin/ip6tables - but some are quite
different.
The following recommendations describe how to strengthen the
default ruleset configuration file. An alternative to editing this
configuration file is to create a shell script that makes calls to
the iptables program to load in rules, and then invokes service
iptables save to write those loaded rules to
/etc/sysconfig/iptables.
The following alterations can be made directly to
/etc/sysconfig/iptables and /etc/sysconfig/ip6tables .
Instructions apply to both unless otherwise noted. Language and address
conventions for regular iptables are used throughout this section;
configuration for ip6tables will be either analogous or explicitly
covered. Warning:
The program system-config-securitylevel
allows additional services to penetrate the default firewall rules
and automatically adjusts /etc/sysconfig/iptables . This program
is only useful if the default ruleset meets your security
requirements. Otherwise, this program should not be used to make
changes to the firewall configuration because it re-writes the
saved configuration file. |
Rule
Set Default iptables Policy for Incoming Packets
[ref] | To set the default policy to DROP (instead of ACCEPT) for
the built-in INPUT chain which processes incoming packets,
add or correct the following line in
/etc/sysconfig/iptables :
:INPUT DROP [0:0] | Rationale: | In iptables the default policy is applied only after all
the applicable rules in the table are examined for a match. Setting the
default policy to DROP implements proper design for a firewall, i.e.
any packets which are not explicitly permitted should not be
accepted. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_set_iptables_default_rule | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CA-3(5), CM-7(b), SC-7(23), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 3.5.3.2.1 | |
|
Rule
Install iptables-persistent Package
[ref] | The iptables-persistent package can be installed with the following command:
$ apt-get install iptables-persistent | Rationale: | A method of configuring and maintaining firewall rules is
necessary to configure a Host Based Firewall. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_iptables-persistent_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.3.1.1 | |
|
Rule
Install iptables Package
[ref] | The iptables package can be installed with the following command:
$ apt-get install iptables | Rationale: | iptables controls the Linux kernel network packet filtering
code. iptables allows system operators to set up firewalls and IP
masquerading, etc.
| Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_iptables_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
CM-6(a), Req-1.4.1, 1.4.2, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.5.3.1.1 | |
|
Rule
Remove iptables-persistent Package
[ref] | The iptables-persistent package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove iptables-persistent | Rationale: | Running both ufw and the services included in the
iptables-persistent package may lead to conflict. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_iptables-persistent_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.1.2 | |
|
Group
IPv6
Group contains 1 group and 7 rules |
[ref]
The system includes support for Internet Protocol
version 6. A major and often-mentioned improvement over IPv4 is its
enormous increase in the number of available addresses. Another
important feature is its support for automatic configuration of
many network settings. |
Group
Configure IPv6 Settings if Necessary
Group contains 7 rules |
[ref]
A major feature of IPv6 is the extent to which systems
implementing it can automatically configure their networking
devices using information from the network. From a security
perspective, manually configuring important configuration
information is preferable to accepting it from the network
in an unauthenticated fashion. |
Rule
Configure Accepting Router Advertisements on All IPv6 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv6.conf.all.accept_ra kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv6.conf.all.accept_ra=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv6.conf.all.accept_ra = 0 | Rationale: | An illicit router advertisement message could result in a man-in-the-middle attack. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv6_conf_all_accept_ra | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.9 | |
|
Rule
Disable Accepting ICMP Redirects for All IPv6 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv6.conf.all.accept_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv6.conf.all.accept_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv6.conf.all.accept_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | An illicit ICMP redirect message could result in a man-in-the-middle attack. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv6_conf_all_accept_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, CCI-001551, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), CM-6(b), CM-6.1(iv), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.2 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Accepting Source-Routed Packets on all IPv6 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv6.conf.all.accept_source_route kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv6.conf.all.accept_source_route=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv6.conf.all.accept_source_route = 0 | Rationale: | Source-routed packets allow the source of the packet to suggest routers
forward the packet along a different path than configured on the router, which can
be used to bypass network security measures. This requirement applies only to the
forwarding of source-routerd traffic, such as when IPv6 forwarding is enabled and
the system is functioning as a router.
Accepting source-routed packets in the IPv6 protocol has few legitimate
uses. It should be disabled unless it is absolutely required. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv6_conf_all_accept_source_route | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 4, 6, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.4.3.3, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), DE.AE-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.1 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for IPv6 Forwarding
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv6.conf.all.forwarding kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv6.conf.all.forwarding=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv6.conf.all.forwarding = 0 | Rationale: | IP forwarding permits the kernel to forward packets from one network
interface to another. The ability to forward packets between two networks is
only appropriate for systems acting as routers. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv6_conf_all_forwarding | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), CM-6(b), CM-6.1(iv), DE.CM-1, PR.DS-4, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.2.2 | |
|
Rule
Disable Accepting Router Advertisements on all IPv6 Interfaces by Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv6.conf.default.accept_ra kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv6.conf.default.accept_ra=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv6.conf.default.accept_ra = 0 | Rationale: | An illicit router advertisement message could result in a man-in-the-middle attack. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv6_conf_default_accept_ra | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.9 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Accepting ICMP Redirects by Default on IPv6 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv6.conf.default.accept_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv6.conf.default.accept_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv6.conf.default.accept_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | An illicit ICMP redirect message could result in a man-in-the-middle attack. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv6_conf_default_accept_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, CCI-001551, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.2 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Accepting Source-Routed Packets on IPv6 Interfaces by Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv6.conf.default.accept_source_route kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv6.conf.default.accept_source_route=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv6.conf.default.accept_source_route = 0 | Rationale: | Source-routed packets allow the source of the packet to suggest routers
forward the packet along a different path than configured on the router, which can
be used to bypass network security measures. This requirement applies only to the
forwarding of source-routerd traffic, such as when IPv6 forwarding is enabled and
the system is functioning as a router.
Accepting source-routed packets in the IPv6 protocol has few legitimate
uses. It should be disabled unless it is absolutely required. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv6_conf_default_accept_source_route | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 4, 6, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.4.3.3, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), CM-6(b), CM-6.1(iv), DE.AE-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-4, Req-1.4.3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.1 | |
|
Group
Kernel Parameters Which Affect Networking
Group contains 2 groups and 16 rules |
[ref]
The sysctl utility is used to set
parameters which affect the operation of the Linux kernel. Kernel parameters
which affect networking and have security implications are described here. |
Group
Network Related Kernel Runtime Parameters for Hosts and Routers
Group contains 13 rules |
[ref]
Certain kernel parameters should be set for systems which are
acting as either hosts or routers to improve the system's ability defend
against certain types of IPv4 protocol attacks. |
Rule
Disable Accepting ICMP Redirects for All IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.all.accept_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.accept_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.all.accept_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | ICMP redirect messages are used by routers to inform hosts that a more
direct route exists for a particular destination. These messages modify the
host's route table and are unauthenticated. An illicit ICMP redirect
message could result in a man-in-the-middle attack.
This feature of the IPv4 protocol has few legitimate uses. It should be
disabled unless absolutely required." | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_all_accept_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, CCI-001503, CCI-001551, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.CM-1, PR.DS-4, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.2 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Accepting Source-Routed Packets on all IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.all.accept_source_route kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.accept_source_route=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.all.accept_source_route = 0 | Rationale: | Source-routed packets allow the source of the packet to suggest routers
forward the packet along a different path than configured on the router,
which can be used to bypass network security measures. This requirement
applies only to the forwarding of source-routerd traffic, such as when IPv4
forwarding is enabled and the system is functioning as a router.
Accepting source-routed packets in the IPv4 protocol has few legitimate
uses. It should be disabled unless it is absolutely required. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_all_accept_source_route | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-007-3 R4, CIP-007-3 R4.1, CIP-007-3 R4.2, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5, CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.1 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Parameter to Log Martian Packets on all IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.all.log_martians kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.log_martians=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.all.log_martians = 1 | Rationale: | The presence of "martian" packets (which have impossible addresses)
as well as spoofed packets, source-routed packets, and redirects could be a
sign of nefarious network activity. Logging these packets enables this activity
to be detected. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_all_log_martians | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000126, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5(3)(a), DE.CM-1, PR.AC-3, PR.DS-4, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.4 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Parameter to Use Reverse Path Filtering on all IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.all.rp_filter kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.rp_filter=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.all.rp_filter = 1 | Rationale: | Enabling reverse path filtering drops packets with source addresses
that should not have been able to be received on the interface they were
received on. It should not be used on systems which are routers for
complicated networks, but is helpful for end hosts and routers serving small
networks. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_all_rp_filter | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, CCI-001551, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.4.3.3, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-4, Req-1.4.3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.7 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Accepting Secure ICMP Redirects on all IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.all.secure_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.secure_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.all.secure_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | Accepting "secure" ICMP redirects (from those gateways listed as
default gateways) has few legitimate uses. It should be disabled unless it is
absolutely required. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_all_secure_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-001503, CCI-001551, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, Req-1.4.3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.3 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Accepting ICMP Redirects by Default on IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.default.accept_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.accept_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.default.accept_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | ICMP redirect messages are used by routers to inform hosts that a more
direct route exists for a particular destination. These messages modify the
host's route table and are unauthenticated. An illicit ICMP redirect
message could result in a man-in-the-middle attack.
This feature of the IPv4 protocol has few legitimate uses. It should
be disabled unless absolutely required. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_default_accept_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, CCI-001551, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, Req-1.4.3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.2 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Accepting Source-Routed Packets on IPv4 Interfaces by Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.default.accept_source_route kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.accept_source_route=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.default.accept_source_route = 0 | Rationale: | Source-routed packets allow the source of the packet to suggest routers
forward the packet along a different path than configured on the router,
which can be used to bypass network security measures.
Accepting source-routed packets in the IPv4 protocol has few legitimate
uses. It should be disabled unless it is absolutely required, such as when
IPv4 forwarding is enabled and the system is legitimately functioning as a
router. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_default_accept_source_route | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, CCI-001551, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-007-3 R4, CIP-007-3 R4.1, CIP-007-3 R4.2, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5, SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.1 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Paremeter to Log Martian Packets on all IPv4 Interfaces by Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.default.log_martians kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.log_martians=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.default.log_martians = 1 | Rationale: | The presence of "martian" packets (which have impossible addresses)
as well as spoofed packets, source-routed packets, and redirects could be a
sign of nefarious network activity. Logging these packets enables this activity
to be detected. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_default_log_martians | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000126, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5(3)(a), DE.CM-1, PR.AC-3, PR.DS-4, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.4 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Parameter to Use Reverse Path Filtering on all IPv4 Interfaces by Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.default.rp_filter kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.rp_filter=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.default.rp_filter = 1 | Rationale: | Enabling reverse path filtering drops packets with source addresses
that should not have been able to be received on the interface they were
received on. It should not be used on systems which are routers for
complicated networks, but is helpful for end hosts and routers serving small
networks. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_default_rp_filter | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.4.3.3, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.7 | |
|
Rule
Configure Kernel Parameter for Accepting Secure Redirects By Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.default.secure_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.secure_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.default.secure_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | Accepting "secure" ICMP redirects (from those gateways listed as
default gateways) has few legitimate uses. It should be disabled unless it is
absolutely required. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_default_secure_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-001551, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-007-3 R4, CIP-007-3 R4.1, CIP-007-3 R4.2, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5, SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.3 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Parameter to Ignore ICMP Broadcast Echo Requests on IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts = 1 | Rationale: | Responding to broadcast (ICMP) echoes facilitates network mapping
and provides a vector for amplification attacks.
Ignoring ICMP echo requests (pings) sent to broadcast or multicast
addresses makes the system slightly more difficult to enumerate on the network. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-007-3 R4, CIP-007-3 R4.1, CIP-007-3 R4.2, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5, DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, Req-1.4.3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.5 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Parameter to Ignore Bogus ICMP Error Responses on IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.icmp_ignore_bogus_error_responses kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.icmp_ignore_bogus_error_responses=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.icmp_ignore_bogus_error_responses = 1 | Rationale: | Ignoring bogus ICMP error responses reduces
log size, although some activity would not be logged. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_icmp_ignore_bogus_error_responses | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.9.1.2, CIP-007-3 R4, CIP-007-3 R4.1, CIP-007-3 R4.2, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5, DE.CM-1, PR.DS-4, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, Req-1.4.3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.3.6 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Parameter to Use TCP Syncookies on Network Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.tcp_syncookies kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_syncookies=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.tcp_syncookies = 1 | Rationale: | A TCP SYN flood attack can cause a denial of service by filling a
system's TCP connection table with connections in the SYN_RCVD state.
Syncookies can be used to track a connection when a subsequent ACK is received,
verifying the initiator is attempting a valid connection and is not a flood
source. This feature is activated when a flood condition is detected, and
enables the system to continue servicing valid connection requests. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_tcp_syncookies | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, CCI-001095, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.4.3.3, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5(1), SC-5(2), SC-5(3)(a), CM-6(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-4, Req-1.4.1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000420-GPOS-00186, SRG-OS-000142-GPOS-00071, UBTU-20-010412, 3.3.8 | |
|
Group
Network Parameters for Hosts Only
Group contains 3 rules |
[ref]
If the system is not going to be used as a router, then setting certain
kernel parameters ensure that the host will not perform routing
of network traffic. |
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Sending ICMP Redirects on all IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.all.send_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.send_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.all.send_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | ICMP redirect messages are used by routers to inform hosts that a more
direct route exists for a particular destination. These messages contain information
from the system's route table possibly revealing portions of the network topology.
The ability to send ICMP redirects is only appropriate for systems acting as routers. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_all_send_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-007-3 R4, CIP-007-3 R4.1, CIP-007-3 R4.2, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5, CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, 1.4.2, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.2.1 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Sending ICMP Redirects on all IPv4 Interfaces by Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.default.send_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.send_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.default.send_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | ICMP redirect messages are used by routers to inform hosts that a more
direct route exists for a particular destination. These messages contain information
from the system's route table possibly revealing portions of the network topology.
The ability to send ICMP redirects is only appropriate for systems acting as routers. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_default_send_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-007-3 R4, CIP-007-3 R4.1, CIP-007-3 R4.2, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5, CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.2.1 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for IP Forwarding on IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.ip_forward kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.ip_forward=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.ip_forward = 0 Warning:
Certain technologies such as virtual machines, containers, etc. rely on IPv4 forwarding to enable and use networking.
Disabling IPv4 forwarding would cause those technologies to stop working. Therefore, this rule should not be used in
profiles or benchmarks that target usage of IPv4 forwarding. | Rationale: | Routing protocol daemons are typically used on routers to exchange
network topology information with other routers. If this capability is used when
not required, system network information may be unnecessarily transmitted across
the network. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_ip_forward | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R22), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.9.1.2, CIP-007-3 R4, CIP-007-3 R4.1, CIP-007-3 R4.2, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5, CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.CM-1, PR.DS-4, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, Req-1.3.1, Req-1.3.2, 1.4.2, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 3.2.2 | |
|
Group
nftables
Group contains 9 rules |
[ref]
If firewalld or iptables are being used in your environment, please follow the guidance in their
respective section and pass-over the guidance in this section.
nftables is a subsystem of the Linux kernel providing filtering and classification of network
packets/datagrams/frames and is the successor to iptables. The biggest change with the
successor nftables is its simplicity. With iptables, we have to configure every single rule and
use the syntax which can be compared with normal commands. With nftables, the simpler
syntax, much like BPF (Berkely Packet Filter) means shorter lines and less repetition.
Support for nftables should also be compiled into the kernel, together with the related
nftables modules.
It is available in Linux kernels >= 3.13. Please ensure that your kernel
supports nftables before choosing this option. |
Rule
Install nftables Package
[ref] | nftables provides a new in-kernel packet classification framework that is based on a
network-specific Virtual Machine (VM) and a new nft userspace command line tool.
nftables reuses the existing Netfilter subsystems such as the existing hook infrastructure,
the connection tracking system, NAT, userspace queuing and logging subsystem.
The nftables package can be installed with the following command:
$ apt-get install nftables | Rationale: | nftables is a subsystem of the Linux kernel that can protect against threats
originating from within a corporate network to include malicious mobile code and poorly
configured software on a host.
| Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_nftables_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.2.1 | |
|
Rule
Uninstall nftables package
[ref] | nftables is a subsystem of the Linux kernel providing filtering and classification of network
packets/datagrams/frames and is the successor to iptables.
The nftables package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove nftables | Rationale: | Running both firewalld and nftables may lead to conflict. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_nftables_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.3.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Verify nftables Service is Enabled
[ref] | The nftables service allows for the loading of nftables rulesets during boot,
or starting on the nftables service
The nftables service can be enabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl enable nftables.service | Rationale: | The nftables service restores the nftables rules from the rules files referenced
in the /etc/sysconfig/nftables.conf file during boot or the starting of
the nftables service | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_nftables_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.2.9 | |
|
Rule
Verify nftables Service is Disabled
[ref] | nftables is a subsystem of the Linux kernel providing filtering and classification of network
packets/datagrams/frames and is the successor to iptables.
The nftables service can be disabled with the following command:
systemctl disable nftables | Rationale: | Running both firewalld and nftables may lead to conflict. nftables
is actually one of the backends for firewalld management tools. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_nftables_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.3.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Ensure nftables Default Deny Firewall Policy
[ref] | Base chain policy is the default verdict that will be applied to packets reaching the end of
the chain. There are two policies: accept (Default) and drop. If the policy is set to accept,
the firewall will accept any packet that is not configured to be denied and the packet will
continue traversing the network stack. Warning:
Changing firewall settings while connected over network can result in being locked out
of the system. | Rationale: | It is easier to allow acceptable usage than to block unacceptable usage. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_nftables_ensure_default_deny_policy | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.2.8 | |
|
Rule
Ensure nftables Rules are Permanent
[ref] | nftables is a subsystem of the Linux kernel providing filtering and classification of
network packets/datagrams/frames. The nftables service reads the
/etc/nftables.conf file for a nftables file or files to
include in the nftables ruleset. A nftables ruleset containing the input, forward, and output
base chains allow network traffic to be filtered. | Rationale: | Changes made to nftables ruleset only affect the live system, you will also need to configure
the nftables ruleset to apply on boot | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_nftables_rules_permanent | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.2.10 | |
|
Rule
Ensure Base Chains Exist for Nftables
[ref] | Tables in nftables hold chains. Each table only has one address family and only applies
to packets of this family. Tables can have one of six families.
Chains are containers for rules. They exist in two kinds, base chains and regular chains.
A base chain is an entry point for packets from the networking stack, a regular chain may
be used as jump target and is used for better rule organization. Warning:
Configuring rules over ssh, by creating a base chain with policy drop will cause loss of connectivity. Ensure that a rule allowing ssh has been added to the base chain prior to setting the base cahin's policy to drop | Rationale: | If a base chain doesn't exist with a hook for input, forward, and delete, packets that would
flow through those chains will not be touched by nftables. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_set_nftables_base_chain | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.2.5 | |
|
Rule
Set nftables Configuration for Loopback Traffic
[ref] | Configure the loopback interface to accept traffic.
Configure all other interfaces to deny traffic to the loopback
network. Warning:
Changing firewall settings while connected over network can
result in being locked out of the system.
Keep in mind the remediation makes changes only to the running
system, in order to keep the changes need to take care to save
the nft settings to the relvant configutation files. | Rationale: | Loopback traffic is generated between processes on machine and is
typically critical to operation of the system. The loopback interface
is the only place that loopback network traffic should be seen,
all other interfaces should ignore traffic on this network as an
anti-spoofing measure. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_set_nftables_loopback_traffic | Identifiers and References | References:
Req-1.4.1, 3.5.2.6 | |
|
Rule
Ensure a Table Exists for Nftables
[ref] | Tables in nftables hold chains. Each table only has one address family and only applies
to packets of this family. Tables can have one of six families. Warning:
Adding rules to a running nftables can cause loss of connectivity to the system. | Rationale: | Nftables doesn't have any default tables. Without a table being built, nftables will not filter
network traffic.
Note: adding rules to a running nftables can cause loss of connectivity to the system. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_set_nftables_table | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.2.4 | |
|
Group
Uncomplicated Firewall (ufw)
Group contains 5 rules |
[ref]
The Linux kernel in Ubuntu provides a packet filtering system called
netfilter, and the traditional interface for manipulating netfilter are
the iptables suite of commands. iptables provide a complete firewall
solution that is both highly configurable and highly flexible.
Becoming proficient in iptables takes time, and getting started with
netfilter firewalling using only iptables can be a daunting task. As a
result, many frontends for iptables have been created over the years,
each trying to achieve a different result and targeting a different
audience.
The Uncomplicated Firewall (ufw) is a frontend for iptables and is
particularly well-suited for host-based firewalls. ufw provides a
framework for managing netfilter, as well as a command-line interface
for manipulating the firewall. ufw aims to provide an easy to use
interface for people unfamiliar with firewall concepts, while at the
same time simplifies complicated iptables commands to help an
administrator who knows what he or she is doing. ufw is an upstream
for other distributions and graphical frontends. |
Rule
Install ufw Package
[ref] | The ufw package can be installed with the following command:
$ apt-get install ufw | Rationale: | ufw controls the Linux kernel network packet filtering
code. ufw allows system operators to set up firewalls and IP
masquerading, etc.
| Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_ufw_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002314, SRG-OS-000297-GPOS-00115, UBTU-20-010433, 3.5.1.1 | |
|
Rule
Remove ufw Package
[ref] | The ufw package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove ufw | Rationale: | Running iptables.persistent with ufw enabled may lead
to conflict and unexpected results. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_ufw_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.2.2 | |
|
Rule
Verify ufw Enabled
[ref] |
The ufw service can be enabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl enable ufw.service | Rationale: | The ufw service must be enabled and running in order for ufw to protect the system | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_ufw_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002314, SRG-OS-000297-GPOS-00115, UBTU-20-010434, 3.5.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Ensure ufw Default Deny Firewall Policy
[ref] | A default deny policy on connections ensures that any unconfigured
network usage will be rejected.
Note: Any port or protocol without a explicit allow before the default
deny will be blocked. Warning:
Changing firewall settings while connected over network can
result in being locked out of the system. | Rationale: | With a default accept policy the firewall will accept any packet that
is not configured to be denied. It is easier to allow acceptable
usage than to block unacceptable usage. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_set_ufw_default_rule | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.1.7 | |
|
Rule
Set UFW Loopback Traffic
[ref] | Configure the loopback interface to accept traffic.
Configure all other interfaces to deny traffic to the loopback
network. Warning:
Changing firewall settings while connected over network can
result in being locked out of the system. | Rationale: | Loopback traffic is generated between processes on machine and is
typically critical to operation of the system. The loopback interface
is the only place that loopback network traffic should be seen, all
other interfaces should ignore traffic on this network as an
anti-spoofing measure. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_set_ufw_loopback_traffic | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.1.4 | |
|
Group
Wireless Networking
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
Wireless networking, such as 802.11
(WiFi) and Bluetooth, can present a security risk to sensitive or
classified systems and networks. Wireless networking hardware is
much more likely to be included in laptop or portable systems than
in desktops or servers.
Removal of hardware provides the greatest assurance that the wireless
capability remains disabled. Acquisition policies often include provisions to
prevent the purchase of equipment that will be used in sensitive spaces and
includes wireless capabilities. If it is impractical to remove the wireless
hardware, and policy permits the device to enter sensitive spaces as long
as wireless is disabled, efforts should instead focus on disabling wireless capability
via software. |
Group
Disable Wireless Through Software Configuration
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If it is impossible to remove the wireless hardware
from the device in question, disable as much of it as possible
through software. The following methods can disable software
support for wireless networking, but note that these methods do not
prevent malicious software or careless users from re-activating the
devices. |
Rule
Deactivate Wireless Network Interfaces
[ref] | Deactivating wireless network interfaces should prevent normal usage of the wireless
capability.
Configure the system to disable all wireless network interfaces with the following command:
$ sudo nmcli radio all off | Rationale: | The use of wireless networking can introduce many different attack vectors into
the organization's network. Common attack vectors such as malicious association
and ad hoc networks will allow an attacker to spoof a wireless access point
(AP), allowing validated systems to connect to the malicious AP and enabling the
attacker to monitor and record network traffic. These malicious APs can also
serve to create a man-in-the-middle attack or be used to create a denial of
service to valid network resources. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_wireless_disable_interfaces | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 12, 14, 15, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.1.16, CCI-000085, CCI-002418, CCI-002421, CCI-001443, CCI-001444, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, 1315, 1319, A.11.2.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.9.1.2, AC-18(a), AC-18(3), CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), MP-7, PR.AC-3, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, Req-1.3.3, 1.4.3, SRG-OS-000299-GPOS-00117, SRG-OS-000300-GPOS-00118, SRG-OS-000424-GPOS-00188, SRG-OS-000481-GPOS-000481, UBTU-20-010455, 3.1.2 | |
|
Group
File Permissions and Masks
Group contains 7 groups and 50 rules |
[ref]
Traditional Unix security relies heavily on file and
directory permissions to prevent unauthorized users from reading or
modifying files to which they should not have access.
Several of the commands in this section search filesystems
for files or directories with certain characteristics, and are
intended to be run on every local partition on a given system.
When the variable PART appears in one of the commands below,
it means that the command is intended to be run repeatedly, with the
name of each local partition substituted for PART in turn.
The following command prints a list of all xfs partitions on the local
system, which is the default filesystem for Ubuntu 20.04
installations:
$ mount -t xfs | awk '{print $3}'
For any systems that use a different
local filesystem type, modify this command as appropriate. |
Group
Verify Permissions on Important Files and
Directories
Group contains 1 group and 29 rules |
[ref]
Permissions for many files on a system must be set
restrictively to ensure sensitive information is properly protected.
This section discusses important
permission restrictions which can be verified
to ensure that no harmful discrepancies have
arisen. |
Group
Verify Permissions on Files with Local Account Information and Credentials
Group contains 24 rules |
[ref]
The default restrictive permissions for files which act as
important security databases such as passwd , shadow ,
group , and gshadow files must be maintained. Many utilities
need read access to the passwd file in order to function properly, but
read access to the shadow file allows malicious attacks against system
passwords, and should never be enabled. |
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns Backup group File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/group- , run the command: $ sudo chgrp root /etc/group- | Rationale: | The /etc/group- file is a backup file of /etc/group , and as such,
it contains information regarding groups that are configured on the system.
Protection of this file is important for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_backup_etc_group | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002223, AC-6 (1), Req-8.7, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.8 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns Backup gshadow File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/gshadow- , run the command: $ sudo chgrp shadow /etc/gshadow- | Rationale: | The /etc/gshadow- file is a backup of /etc/gshadow , and as such,
it contains group password hashes. Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_backup_etc_gshadow | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002223, AC-6 (1), Req-8.7, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns Backup passwd File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/passwd- , run the command: $ sudo chgrp root /etc/passwd- | Rationale: | The /etc/passwd- file is a backup file of /etc/passwd , and as such,
it contains information about the users that are configured on the system.
Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_backup_etc_passwd | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002223, AC-6 (1), Req-8.7, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.6 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns Backup shadow File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/shadow- , run the command: $ sudo chgrp shadow /etc/shadow- | Rationale: | The /etc/shadow- file is a backup file of /etc/shadow , and as such,
it contains the list of local system accounts and password hashes.
Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_backup_etc_shadow | Identifiers and References | References:
Req-8.7, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.7 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns group File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/group , run the command: $ sudo chgrp root /etc/group | Rationale: | The /etc/group file contains information regarding groups that are configured
on the system. Protection of this file is important for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_etc_group | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.5 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns gshadow File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/gshadow , run the command: $ sudo chgrp shadow /etc/gshadow | Rationale: | The /etc/gshadow file contains group password hashes. Protection of this file
is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_etc_gshadow | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.9 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns passwd File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/passwd , run the command: $ sudo chgrp root /etc/passwd | Rationale: | The /etc/passwd file contains information about the users that are configured on
the system. Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_etc_passwd | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns shadow File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/shadow , run the command: $ sudo chgrp shadow /etc/shadow | Rationale: | The /etc/shadow file stores password hashes. Protection of this file is
critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_etc_shadow | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns Backup group File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/group- , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/group- | Rationale: | The /etc/group- file is a backup file of /etc/group , and as such,
it contains information regarding groups that are configured on the system.
Protection of this file is important for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_backup_etc_group | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002223, AC-6 (1), Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.8 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns Backup gshadow File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/gshadow- , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/gshadow- | Rationale: | The /etc/gshadow- file is a backup of /etc/gshadow , and as such,
it contains group password hashes. Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_backup_etc_gshadow | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002223, AC-6 (1), Req-8.7, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns Backup passwd File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/passwd- , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/passwd- | Rationale: | The /etc/passwd- file is a backup file of /etc/passwd , and as such,
it contains information about the users that are configured on the system.
Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_backup_etc_passwd | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002223, AC-6 (1), Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.6 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns Backup shadow File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/shadow- , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/shadow- | Rationale: | The /etc/shadow- file is a backup file of /etc/shadow , and as such,
it contains the list of local system accounts and password hashes.
Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_backup_etc_shadow | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002223, AC-6 (1), Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.7 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns group File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/group , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/group | Rationale: | The /etc/group file contains information regarding groups that are configured
on the system. Protection of this file is important for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_etc_group | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-002223, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.5 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns gshadow File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/gshadow , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/gshadow | Rationale: | The /etc/gshadow file contains group password hashes. Protection of this file
is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_etc_gshadow | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R36), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-002223, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.9 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns passwd File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/passwd , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/passwd | Rationale: | The /etc/passwd file contains information about the users that are configured on
the system. Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_etc_passwd | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-002223, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns shadow File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/shadow , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/shadow | Rationale: | The /etc/shadow file contains the list of local
system accounts and stores password hashes. Protection of this file is
critical for system security. Failure to give ownership of this file
to root provides the designated owner with access to sensitive information
which could weaken the system security posture. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_etc_shadow | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R36), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-002223, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on Backup group File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/group- , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/group- | Rationale: | The /etc/group- file is a backup file of /etc/group , and as such,
it contains information regarding groups that are configured on the system.
Protection of this file is important for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_backup_etc_group | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002223, AC-6 (1), Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.8 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on Backup gshadow File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/gshadow- , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0640 /etc/gshadow- | Rationale: | The /etc/gshadow- file is a backup of /etc/gshadow , and as such,
it contains group password hashes. Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_backup_etc_gshadow | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002223, AC-6 (1), SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on Backup passwd File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/passwd- , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/passwd- | Rationale: | The /etc/passwd- file is a backup file of /etc/passwd , and as such,
it contains information about the users that are configured on the system.
Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_backup_etc_passwd | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002223, AC-6 (1), Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.6 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on Backup shadow File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/shadow- , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0640 /etc/shadow- | Rationale: | The /etc/shadow- file is a backup file of /etc/shadow , and as such,
it contains the list of local system accounts and password hashes.
Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_backup_etc_shadow | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-002223, AC-6 (1), Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.7 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on group File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/passwd , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/passwd | Rationale: | The /etc/group file contains information regarding groups that are configured
on the system. Protection of this file is important for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_group | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R36), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-002223, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.5 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on gshadow File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/gshadow , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0640 /etc/gshadow | Rationale: | The /etc/gshadow file contains group password hashes. Protection of this file
is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_gshadow | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R36), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-002223, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.9 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on passwd File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/passwd , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/passwd | Rationale: | If the /etc/passwd file is writable by a group-owner or the
world the risk of its compromise is increased. The file contains the list of
accounts on the system and associated information, and protection of this file
is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_passwd | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R36), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-002223, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on shadow File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/shadow , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0640 /etc/shadow | Rationale: | The /etc/shadow file contains the list of local
system accounts and stores password hashes. Protection of this file is
critical for system security. Failure to give ownership of this file
to root provides the designated owner with access to sensitive information
which could weaken the system security posture. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_shadow | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R36), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-002223, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c, 7.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Verify that All World-Writable Directories Have Sticky Bits Set
[ref] | When the so-called 'sticky bit' is set on a directory,
only the owner of a given file may remove that file from the
directory. Without the sticky bit, any user with write access to a
directory may remove any file in the directory. Setting the sticky
bit prevents users from removing each other's files. In cases where
there is no reason for a directory to be world-writable, a better
solution is to remove that permission rather than to set the sticky
bit. However, if a directory is used by a particular application,
consult that application's documentation instead of blindly
changing modes.
To set the sticky bit on a world-writable directory DIR, run the
following command:
$ sudo chmod +t DIR | Rationale: | Failing to set the sticky bit on public directories allows unauthorized
users to delete files in the directory structure.
The only authorized public directories are those temporary directories
supplied with the system, or those designed to be temporary file
repositories. The setting is normally reserved for directories used by the
system, by users for temporary file storage (such as /tmp ), and
for directories requiring global read/write access. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_dir_perms_world_writable_sticky_bits | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R40), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-001090, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000138-GPOS-00069, UBTU-20-010411, 1.1.22 | |
|
Rule
Ensure No World-Writable Files Exist
[ref] | It is generally a good idea to remove global (other) write
access to a file when it is discovered. However, check with
documentation for specific applications before making changes.
Also, monitor for recurring world-writable files, as these may be
symptoms of a misconfigured application or user account. Finally,
this applies to real files and not virtual files that are a part of
pseudo file systems such as sysfs or procfs . | Rationale: | Data in world-writable files can be modified by any
user on the system. In almost all circumstances, files can be
configured using a combination of user and group permissions to
support whatever legitimate access is needed without the risk
caused by world-writable files. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_unauthorized_world_writable | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R40), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, 2.2.6, 6.1.10 | |
|
Rule
Ensure All Files Are Owned by a Group
[ref] | If any files are not owned by a group, then the
cause of their lack of group-ownership should be investigated.
Following this, the files should be deleted or assigned to an
appropriate group. The following command will discover and print
any files on local partitions which do not belong to a valid group:
$ df --local -P | awk '{if (NR!=1) print $6}' | sudo xargs -I '{}' find '{}' -xdev -nogroup
To search all filesystems on a system including network mounted
filesystems the following command can be run manually for each partition:
$ sudo find PARTITION -xdev -nogroup Warning:
This rule only considers local groups.
If you have your groups defined outside /etc/group , the rule won't consider those. | Rationale: | Unowned files do not directly imply a security problem, but they are generally
a sign that something is amiss. They may
be caused by an intruder, by incorrect software installation or
draft software removal, or by failure to remove all files belonging
to a deleted account. The files should be repaired so they
will not cause problems when accounts are created in the future,
and the cause should be discovered and addressed. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_ungroupowned | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R55), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.02, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, DSS06.10, CCI-000366, CCI-002165, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-3, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.12 | |
|
Rule
Ensure All Files Are Owned by a User
[ref] | If any files are not owned by a user, then the
cause of their lack of ownership should be investigated.
Following this, the files should be deleted or assigned to an
appropriate user. The following command will discover and print
any files on local partitions which do not belong to a valid user:
$ df --local -P | awk {'if (NR!=1) print $6'} | sudo xargs -I '{}' find '{}' -xdev -nouser
To search all filesystems on a system including network mounted
filesystems the following command can be run manually for each partition:
$ sudo find PARTITION -xdev -nouser Warning:
For this rule to evaluate centralized user accounts, getent must be working properly
so that running the command getent passwd returns a list of all users in your organization.
If using the System Security Services Daemon (SSSD), enumerate = true must be configured
in your organization's domain to return a complete list of users Warning:
Enabling this rule will result in slower scan times depending on the size of your organization
and number of centralized users. | Rationale: | Unowned files do not directly imply a security problem, but they are generally
a sign that something is amiss. They may
be caused by an intruder, by incorrect software installation or
draft software removal, or by failure to remove all files belonging
to a deleted account. The files should be repaired so they
will not cause problems when accounts are created in the future,
and the cause should be discovered and addressed. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_no_files_unowned_by_user | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R55), 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 9, APO01.06, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, CCI-002165, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 5.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 6.1.11 | |
|
Rule
Verify permissions of log files
[ref] | Any operating system providing too much information in error messages
risks compromising the data and security of the structure, and content
of error messages needs to be carefully considered by the organization.
Organizations carefully consider the structure/content of error messages.
The extent to which information systems are able to identify and handle
error conditions is guided by organizational policy and operational
requirements. Information that could be exploited by adversaries includes,
for example, erroneous logon attempts with passwords entered by mistake
as the username, mission/business information that can be derived from
(if not stated explicitly by) information recorded, and personal
information, such as account numbers, social security numbers, and credit
card numbers. | Rationale: | The Ubuntu 20.04 must generate error messages that provide information
necessary for corrective actions without revealing information that could
be exploited by adversaries. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_permissions_local_var_log | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-001312, SI-11(a), SI-11(b), SI-11.1(iii), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000205-GPOS-00083, UBTU-20-010416, 4.2.3 | |
|
Group
Restrict Dynamic Mounting and Unmounting of
Filesystems
Group contains 8 rules |
[ref]
Linux includes a number of facilities for the automated addition
and removal of filesystems on a running system. These facilities may be
necessary in many environments, but this capability also carries some risk -- whether direct
risk from allowing users to introduce arbitrary filesystems,
or risk that software flaws in the automated mount facility itself could
allow an attacker to compromise the system.
This command can be used to list the types of filesystems that are
available to the currently executing kernel:
$ find /lib/modules/`uname -r`/kernel/fs -type f -name '*.ko'
If these filesystems are not required then they can be explicitly disabled
in a configuratio file in /etc/modprobe.d . |
Rule
Disable the Automounter
[ref] | The autofs daemon mounts and unmounts filesystems, such as user
home directories shared via NFS, on demand. In addition, autofs can be used to handle
removable media, and the default configuration provides the cdrom device as /misc/cd .
However, this method of providing access to removable media is not common, so autofs
can almost always be disabled if NFS is not in use. Even if NFS is required, it may be
possible to configure filesystem mounts statically by editing /etc/fstab
rather than relying on the automounter.
The autofs service can be disabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl mask --now autofs.service | Rationale: | Disabling the automounter permits the administrator to
statically control filesystem mounting through /etc/fstab .
Additionally, automatically mounting filesystems permits easy introduction of
unknown devices, thereby facilitating malicious activity. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_autofs_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 15, 16, 5, APO13.01, DSS01.04, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.4.6, CCI-000366, CCI-000778, CCI-001958, 164.308(a)(3)(i), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2), 164.312(a)(1), 164.312(a)(2)(iv), 164.312(b), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.6, A.11.2.6, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.18.1.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), MP-7, PR.AC-1, PR.AC-3, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, SRG-OS-000114-GPOS-00059, SRG-OS-000378-GPOS-00163, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 1.1.23 | |
|
Rule
Disable Mounting of cramfs
[ref] |
To configure the system to prevent the cramfs
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to the file /etc/modprobe.d/cramfs.conf :
install cramfs /bin/true
This effectively prevents usage of this uncommon filesystem.
The cramfs filesystem type is a compressed read-only
Linux filesystem embedded in small footprint systems. A
cramfs image can be used without having to first
decompress the image. | Rationale: | Removing support for unneeded filesystem types reduces the local attack surface
of the server. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_cramfs_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.6, CCI-000381, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000095-GPOS-00049, 1.1.1.1 | |
|
Rule
Disable Mounting of freevxfs
[ref] |
To configure the system to prevent the freevxfs
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to the file /etc/modprobe.d/freevxfs.conf :
install freevxfs /bin/true
This effectively prevents usage of this uncommon filesystem. | Rationale: | Linux kernel modules which implement filesystems that are not needed by the
local system should be disabled. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_freevxfs_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.6, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 1.1.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Disable Mounting of hfs
[ref] |
To configure the system to prevent the hfs
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to the file /etc/modprobe.d/hfs.conf :
install hfs /bin/true
This effectively prevents usage of this uncommon filesystem. | Rationale: | Linux kernel modules which implement filesystems that are not needed by the
local system should be disabled. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_hfs_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.6, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 1.1.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Disable Mounting of hfsplus
[ref] |
To configure the system to prevent the hfsplus
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to the file /etc/modprobe.d/hfsplus.conf :
install hfsplus /bin/true
This effectively prevents usage of this uncommon filesystem. | Rationale: | Linux kernel modules which implement filesystems that are not needed by the
local system should be disabled. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_hfsplus_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.6, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 1.1.1.5 | |
|
Rule
Disable Mounting of jffs2
[ref] |
To configure the system to prevent the jffs2
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to the file /etc/modprobe.d/jffs2.conf :
install jffs2 /bin/true
This effectively prevents usage of this uncommon filesystem. | Rationale: | Linux kernel modules which implement filesystems that are not needed by the
local system should be disabled. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_jffs2_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.6, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 1.1.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Disable Mounting of udf
[ref] |
To configure the system to prevent the udf
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to the file /etc/modprobe.d/udf.conf :
install udf /bin/true
This effectively prevents usage of this uncommon filesystem.
The udf filesystem type is the universal disk format
used to implement the ISO/IEC 13346 and ECMA-167 specifications.
This is an open vendor filesystem type for data storage on a broad
range of media. This filesystem type is neccessary to support
writing DVDs and newer optical disc formats. | Rationale: | Removing support for unneeded filesystem types reduces the local
attack surface of the system. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_udf_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.6, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 1.1.1.6 | |
|
Rule
Disable Modprobe Loading of USB Storage Driver
[ref] | To prevent USB storage devices from being used, configure the kernel module loading system
to prevent automatic loading of the USB storage driver.
To configure the system to prevent the usb-storage
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to the file /etc/modprobe.d/usb-storage.conf :
install usb-storage /bin/true
This will prevent the modprobe program from loading the usb-storage
module, but will not prevent an administrator (or another program) from using the
insmod program to load the module manually. | Rationale: | USB storage devices such as thumb drives can be used to introduce
malicious software. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_usb-storage_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 15, 16, 5, APO13.01, DSS01.04, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.1.21, CCI-000366, CCI-000778, CCI-001958, 164.308(a)(3)(i), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2), 164.312(a)(1), 164.312(a)(2)(iv), 164.312(b), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.6, A.11.2.6, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.18.1.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), MP-7, PR.AC-1, PR.AC-3, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, SRG-OS-000114-GPOS-00059, SRG-OS-000378-GPOS-00163, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 1.1.24 | |
|
Group
Restrict Partition Mount Options
Group contains 10 rules |
[ref]
System partitions can be mounted with certain options
that limit what files on those partitions can do. These options
are set in the /etc/fstab configuration file, and can be
used to make certain types of malicious behavior more difficult. |
Rule
Add nodev Option to /dev/shm
[ref] | The nodev mount option can be used to prevent creation of device
files in /dev/shm . Legitimate character and block devices should
not exist within temporary directories like /dev/shm .
Add the nodev option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/dev/shm . | Rationale: | The only legitimate location for device files is the /dev directory
located on the root partition. The only exception to this is chroot jails. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_dev_shm_nodev | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 13, 14, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS06.06, CCI-001764, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154, 1.1.7 | |
|
Rule
Add noexec Option to /dev/shm
[ref] | The noexec mount option can be used to prevent binaries
from being executed out of /dev/shm .
It can be dangerous to allow the execution of binaries
from world-writable temporary storage directories such as /dev/shm .
Add the noexec option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/dev/shm . | Rationale: | Allowing users to execute binaries from world-writable directories
such as /dev/shm can expose the system to potential compromise. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_dev_shm_noexec | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 13, 14, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS06.06, CCI-001764, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154, 1.1.9 | |
|
Rule
Add nosuid Option to /dev/shm
[ref] | The nosuid mount option can be used to prevent execution
of setuid programs in /dev/shm . The SUID and SGID permissions should not
be required in these world-writable directories.
Add the nosuid option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/dev/shm . | Rationale: | The presence of SUID and SGID executables should be tightly controlled. Users
should not be able to execute SUID or SGID binaries from temporary storage partitions. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_dev_shm_nosuid | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 13, 14, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS06.06, CCI-001764, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154, 1.1.8 | |
|
Rule
Add nodev Option to /home
[ref] | The nodev mount option can be used to prevent device files from
being created in /home .
Legitimate character and block devices should exist only in
the /dev directory on the root partition or within chroot
jails built for system services.
Add the nodev option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/home . | Rationale: | The only legitimate location for device files is the /dev directory
located on the root partition. The only exception to this is chroot jails. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_home_nodev | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R12), SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154, 1.1.18 | |
|
Rule
Add nodev Option to /tmp
[ref] | The nodev mount option can be used to prevent device files from
being created in /tmp . Legitimate character and block devices
should not exist within temporary directories like /tmp .
Add the nodev option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/tmp . | Rationale: | The only legitimate location for device files is the /dev directory
located on the root partition. The only exception to this is chroot jails. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_tmp_nodev | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R12), 11, 13, 14, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS06.06, CCI-001764, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154, 1.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Add noexec Option to /tmp
[ref] | The noexec mount option can be used to prevent binaries
from being executed out of /tmp .
Add the noexec option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/tmp . | Rationale: | Allowing users to execute binaries from world-writable directories
such as /tmp should never be necessary in normal operation and
can expose the system to potential compromise. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_tmp_noexec | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R12), 11, 13, 14, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS06.06, CCI-001764, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154, 1.1.5 | |
|
Rule
Add nosuid Option to /tmp
[ref] | The nosuid mount option can be used to prevent
execution of setuid programs in /tmp . The SUID and SGID permissions
should not be required in these world-writable directories.
Add the nosuid option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/tmp . | Rationale: | The presence of SUID and SGID executables should be tightly controlled. Users
should not be able to execute SUID or SGID binaries from temporary storage partitions. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_tmp_nosuid | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R12), 11, 13, 14, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS06.06, CCI-001764, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154, 1.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Add nodev Option to /var/tmp
[ref] | The nodev mount option can be used to prevent device files from
being created in /var/tmp . Legitimate character and block devices
should not exist within temporary directories like /var/tmp .
Add the nodev option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/var/tmp . | Rationale: | The only legitimate location for device files is the /dev directory
located on the root partition. The only exception to this is chroot jails. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_var_tmp_nodev | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R12), CCI-001764, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154, 1.1.12 | |
|
Rule
Add noexec Option to /var/tmp
[ref] | The noexec mount option can be used to prevent binaries
from being executed out of /var/tmp .
Add the noexec option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/var/tmp . | Rationale: | Allowing users to execute binaries from world-writable directories
such as /var/tmp should never be necessary in normal operation and
can expose the system to potential compromise. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_var_tmp_noexec | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R12), CCI-001764, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154, 1.1.14 | |
|
Rule
Add nosuid Option to /var/tmp
[ref] | The nosuid mount option can be used to prevent
execution of setuid programs in /var/tmp . The SUID and SGID permissions
should not be required in these world-writable directories.
Add the nosuid option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/var/tmp . | Rationale: | The presence of SUID and SGID executables should be tightly controlled. Users
should not be able to execute SUID or SGID binaries from temporary storage partitions. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_var_tmp_nosuid | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R12), CCI-001764, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154, 1.1.13 | |
|
Group
Restrict Programs from Dangerous Execution Patterns
Group contains 2 groups and 3 rules |
[ref]
The recommendations in this section are designed to
ensure that the system's features to protect against potentially
dangerous program execution are activated.
These protections are applied at the system initialization or
kernel level, and defend against certain types of badly-configured
or compromised programs. |
Group
Disable Core Dumps
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
A core dump file is the memory image of an executable
program when it was terminated by the operating system due to
errant behavior. In most cases, only software developers
legitimately need to access these files. The core dump files may
also contain sensitive information, or unnecessarily occupy large
amounts of disk space.
Once a hard limit is set in /etc/security/limits.conf , or
to a file within the /etc/security/limits.d/ directory, a
user cannot increase that limit within his or her own session. If access
to core dumps is required, consider restricting them to only
certain users or groups. See the limits.conf man page for more
information.
The core dumps of setuid programs are further protected. The
sysctl variable fs.suid_dumpable controls whether
the kernel allows core dumps from these programs at all. The default
value of 0 is recommended. |
Rule
Disable Core Dumps for All Users
[ref] | To disable core dumps for all users, add the following line to
/etc/security/limits.conf , or to a file within the
/etc/security/limits.d/ directory:
* hard core 0 | Rationale: | A core dump includes a memory image taken at the time the operating system
terminates an application. The memory image could contain sensitive data and is generally useful
only for developers trying to debug problems. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_disable_users_coredumps | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 13, 15, 16, 2, 7, 8, APO13.01, BAI04.04, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.07, CCI-000366, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, A.12.1.3, A.17.2.1, CM-6, SC-7(10), DE.CM-1, PR.DS-4, 3.3.1.1, 3.3.1.2, 3.3.1.3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 1.6.4 | |
|
Rule
Disable Core Dumps for SUID programs
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the fs.suid_dumpable kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w fs.suid_dumpable=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : fs.suid_dumpable = 0 | Rationale: | The core dump of a setuid program is more likely to contain
sensitive data, as the program itself runs with greater privileges than the
user who initiated execution of the program. Disabling the ability for any
setuid program to write a core file decreases the risk of unauthorized access
of such data. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_fs_suid_dumpable | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R23), 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3), 164.308(a)(4), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.312(a), 164.312(e), SI-11(a), SI-11(b), 3.3.1.1, 3.3.1.2, 3.3.1.3, 1.6.4 | |
|
Group
Enable ExecShield
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
ExecShield describes kernel features that provide
protection against exploitation of memory corruption errors such as buffer
overflows. These features include random placement of the stack and other
memory regions, prevention of execution in memory that should only hold data,
and special handling of text buffers. These protections are enabled by default
on 32-bit systems and controlled through sysctl variables
kernel.exec-shield and kernel.randomize_va_space . On the latest
64-bit systems, kernel.exec-shield cannot be enabled or disabled with
sysctl . |
Rule
Enable Randomized Layout of Virtual Address Space
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the kernel.randomize_va_space kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w kernel.randomize_va_space=2
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : kernel.randomize_va_space = 2 | Rationale: | Address space layout randomization (ASLR) makes it more difficult for an
attacker to predict the location of attack code they have introduced into a
process's address space during an attempt at exploitation. Additionally,
ASLR makes it more difficult for an attacker to know the location of
existing code in order to re-purpose it using return oriented programming
(ROP) techniques. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_kernel_randomize_va_space | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R23), 3.1.7, CCI-000366, CCI-002824, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3), 164.308(a)(4), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.312(a), 164.312(e), CIP-002-5 R1.1, CIP-002-5 R1.2, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 4.1, CIP-004-6 4.2, CIP-004-6 R2.2.3, CIP-004-6 R2.2.4, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-004-6 R4, CIP-005-6 R1, CIP-005-6 R1.1, CIP-005-6 R1.2, CIP-007-3 R3, CIP-007-3 R3.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CIP-007-3 R5.1.3, CIP-007-3 R5.2.1, CIP-007-3 R5.2.3, CIP-007-3 R8.4, CIP-009-6 R.1.1, CIP-009-6 R4, SC-30, SC-30(2), CM-6(a), Req-2.2.1, 2.2.3, SRG-OS-000433-GPOS-00193, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, UBTU-20-010448, 1.6.2 | |
|
Group
Services
Group contains 42 groups and 84 rules |
[ref]
The best protection against vulnerable software is running less software. This section describes how to review
the software which Ubuntu 20.04 installs on a system and disable software which is not needed. It
then enumerates the software packages installed on a default Ubuntu 20.04 system and provides guidance about which
ones can be safely disabled.
Ubuntu 20.04 provides a convenient minimal install option that essentially installs the bare necessities for a functional
system. When building Ubuntu 20.04 systems, it is highly recommended to select the minimal packages and then build up
the system from there. |
Group
Avahi Server
Group contains 1 group and 2 rules |
[ref]
The Avahi daemon implements the DNS Service Discovery
and Multicast DNS protocols, which provide service and host
discovery on a network. It allows a system to automatically
identify resources on the network, such as printers or web servers.
This capability is also known as mDNSresponder and is a major part
of Zeroconf networking. |
Group
Disable Avahi Server if Possible
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
Because the Avahi daemon service keeps an open network
port, it is subject to network attacks.
Disabling it can reduce the system's vulnerability to such attacks. |
Rule
Uninstall avahi Server Package
[ref] | If the system does not need to have an Avahi server which implements
the DNS Service Discovery and Multicast DNS protocols,
the avahi-autoipd and avahi packages can be uninstalled. | Rationale: | Automatic discovery of network services is not normally required for
system functionality. It is recommended to remove this package to reduce
the potential attack surface. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_avahi_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.3 | |
|
Rule
Disable Avahi Server Software
[ref] |
The avahi-daemon service can be disabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl mask --now avahi-daemon.service | Rationale: | Because the Avahi daemon service keeps an open network
port, it is subject to network attacks. Its functionality
is convenient but is only appropriate if the local network
can be trusted. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_avahi-daemon_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.4, 2.2.3 | |
|
Group
Cron and At Daemons
Group contains 1 group and 25 rules |
[ref]
The cron and at services are used to allow commands to
be executed at a later time. The cron service is required by almost
all systems to perform necessary maintenance tasks, while at may or
may not be required on a given system. Both daemons should be
configured defensively. |
Group
Restrict at and cron to Authorized Users if Necessary
Group contains 6 rules |
[ref]
The /etc/cron.allow and /etc/at.allow files contain lists of
users who are allowed to use cron and at to delay execution of
processes. If these files exist and if the corresponding files
/etc/cron.deny and /etc/at.deny do not exist, then only users
listed in the relevant allow files can run the crontab and at commands
to submit jobs to be run at scheduled intervals. On many systems, only the
system administrator needs the ability to schedule jobs. Note that even if a
given user is not listed in cron.allow , cron jobs can still be run as
that user. The cron.allow file controls only administrative access
to the crontab command for scheduling and modifying cron jobs.
To restrict at and cron to only authorized users:
- Remove the
cron.deny file:$ sudo rm /etc/cron.deny - Edit
/etc/cron.allow , adding one line for each user allowed to use
the crontab command to create cron jobs. - Remove the
at.deny file:$ sudo rm /etc/at.deny - Edit
/etc/at.allow , adding one line for each user allowed to use
the at command to create at jobs.
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns /etc/at.allow file
[ref] | If /etc/at.allow exists, it must be group-owned by root .
To properly set the group owner of /etc/at.allow , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/at.allow | Rationale: | If the owner of the at.allow file is not set to root, the possibility exists for an
unauthorized user to view or edit sensitive information. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_at_allow | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.6, 5.1.9 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns /etc/cron.allow file
[ref] | If /etc/cron.allow exists, it must be group-owned by root .
To properly set the group owner of /etc/cron.allow , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/cron.allow | Rationale: | If the owner of the cron.allow file is not set to root, the possibility exists for an
unauthorized user to view or edit sensitive information. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_cron_allow | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.8 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns /etc/at.allow file
[ref] | If /etc/at.allow exists, it must be owned by root .
To properly set the owner of /etc/at.allow , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/at.allow | Rationale: | If the owner of the at.allow file is not set to root, the possibility exists for an
unauthorized user to view or edit sensitive information. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_at_allow | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.6, 5.1.9 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns /etc/cron.allow file
[ref] | If /etc/cron.allow exists, it must be owned by root .
To properly set the owner of /etc/cron.allow , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/cron.allow | Rationale: | If the owner of the cron.allow file is not set to root, the possibility exists for an
unauthorized user to view or edit sensitive information. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_cron_allow | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.8 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on /etc/at.allow file
[ref] | If /etc/at.allow exists, it must have permissions 0640
or more restrictive.
To properly set the permissions of /etc/at.allow , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0640 /etc/at.allow | Rationale: | If the permissions of the at.allow file are not set to 0640 or more restrictive,
the possibility exists for an unauthorized user to view or edit sensitive information. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_at_allow | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.6, 5.1.9 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on /etc/cron.allow file
[ref] | If /etc/cron.allow exists, it must have permissions 0640
or more restrictive.
To properly set the permissions of /etc/cron.allow , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0640 /etc/cron.allow | Rationale: | If the permissions of the cron.allow file are not set to 0640 or more restrictive,
the possibility exists for an unauthorized user to view or edit sensitive information. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_cron_allow | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.8 | |
|
Rule
Enable cron Service
[ref] | The crond service is used to execute commands at
preconfigured times. It is required by almost all systems to perform necessary
maintenance tasks, such as notifying root of system activity.
The cron service can be enabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl enable cron.service | Rationale: | Due to its usage for maintenance and security-supporting tasks,
enabling the cron daemon is essential. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_cron_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.6, 5.1.1 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns cron.d
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/cron.d , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/cron.d | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_cron_d | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.7 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns cron.daily
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/cron.daily , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/cron.daily | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_cron_daily | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns cron.hourly
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/cron.hourly , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/cron.hourly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_cron_hourly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns cron.monthly
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/cron.monthly , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/cron.monthly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_cron_monthly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.6 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns cron.weekly
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/cron.weekly , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/cron.weekly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_cron_weekly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.5 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns Crontab
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/crontab , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/crontab | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_crontab | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on cron.d
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/cron.d , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/cron.d | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct user to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_cron_d | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.7 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on cron.daily
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/cron.daily , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/cron.daily | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct user to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_cron_daily | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on cron.hourly
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/cron.hourly , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/cron.hourly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct user to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_cron_hourly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on cron.monthly
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/cron.monthly , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/cron.monthly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct user to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_cron_monthly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.6 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on cron.weekly
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/cron.weekly , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/cron.weekly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct user to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_cron_weekly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.5 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on crontab
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/crontab , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/crontab | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct user to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_crontab | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on cron.d
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/cron.d , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0700 /etc/cron.d | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should have the
correct access rights to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_cron_d | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.7 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on cron.daily
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/cron.daily , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0700 /etc/cron.daily | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should have the
correct access rights to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_cron_daily | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on cron.hourly
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/cron.hourly , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0700 /etc/cron.hourly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should have the
correct access rights to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_cron_hourly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on cron.monthly
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/cron.monthly , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0700 /etc/cron.monthly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should have the
correct access rights to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_cron_monthly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.6 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on cron.weekly
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/cron.weekly , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0700 /etc/cron.weekly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should have the
correct access rights to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_cron_weekly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.5 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on crontab
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/crontab , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0600 /etc/crontab | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should have the
correct access rights to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_crontab | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.1.2 | |
|
Group
Deprecated services
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
Some deprecated software services impact the overall system security due to their behavior (leak of
confidentiality in network exchange, usage as uncontrolled communication channel, risk associated with the service due to its old age, etc. |
Rule
Uninstall the nis package
[ref] | The support for Yellowpages should not be installed unless it is required. | Rationale: | NIS is the historical SUN service for central account management, more and more replaced by LDAP.
NIS does not support efficiently security constraints, ACL, etc. and should not be used. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_nis_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.17 | |
|
Group
DHCP
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) allows
systems to request and obtain an IP address and other configuration
parameters from a server.
This guide recommends configuring networking on clients by manually editing
the appropriate files under /etc/sysconfig . Use of DHCP can make client
systems vulnerable to compromise by rogue DHCP servers, and should be avoided
unless necessary. If using DHCP is necessary, however, there are best practices
that should be followed to minimize security risk. |
Group
Disable DHCP Server
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The DHCP server dhcpd is not installed or activated by
default. If the software was installed and activated, but the
system does not need to act as a DHCP server, it should be disabled
and removed. |
Rule
Uninstall DHCP Server Package
[ref] | If the system does not need to act as a DHCP server,
the dhcp package can be uninstalled.
The isc-dhcp-server package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove isc-dhcp-server | Rationale: | Removing the DHCP server ensures that it cannot be easily or
accidentally reactivated and disrupt network operation. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_dhcp_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R1), 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.4, 2.2.5 | |
|
Group
DNS Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
Most organizations have an operational need to run at
least one nameserver. However, there are many common attacks
involving DNS server software, and this server software should
be disabled on any system
on which it is not needed. |
Group
Disable DNS Server
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
DNS software should be disabled on any systems which does not
need to be a nameserver. Note that the BIND DNS server software is
not installed on Ubuntu 20.04 by default. The remainder of this section
discusses secure configuration of systems which must be
nameservers. |
Rule
Uninstall bind Package
[ref] | The named service is provided by the bind package.
The bind package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove bind | Rationale: | If there is no need to make DNS server software available,
removing it provides a safeguard against its activation. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_bind_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.4, 2.2.8 | |
|
Group
FTP Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
FTP is a common method for allowing remote access to
files. Like telnet, the FTP protocol is unencrypted, which means
that passwords and other data transmitted during the session can be
captured and that the session is vulnerable to hijacking.
Therefore, running the FTP server software is not recommended.
However, there are some FTP server configurations which may
be appropriate for some environments, particularly those which
allow only read-only anonymous access as a means of downloading
data available to the public. |
Group
Disable vsftpd if Possible
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
To minimize attack surface, disable vsftpd if at all
possible. |
Rule
Uninstall vsftpd Package
[ref] | The vsftpd package can be removed with the following command: $ apt-get remove vsftpd | Rationale: | Removing the vsftpd package decreases the risk of its
accidental activation. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_vsftpd_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000197, CCI-000366, CCI-000381, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), IA-5(1)(c), IA-5(1).1(v), CM-7, CM-7.1(ii), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.4, SRG-OS-000074-GPOS-00042, SRG-OS-000095-GPOS-00049, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 2.2.9 | |
|
Group
Web Server
Group contains 2 groups and 2 rules |
[ref]
The web server is responsible for providing access to
content via the HTTP protocol. Web servers represent a significant
security risk because:
- The HTTP port is commonly probed by malicious sources
- Web server software is very complex, and includes a long
history of vulnerabilities
- The HTTP protocol is unencrypted and vulnerable to passive
monitoring
The system's default web server software is Apache 2 and is
provided in the RPM package httpd . |
Group
Disable Apache if Possible
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If Apache was installed and activated, but the system
does not need to act as a web server, then it should be disabled
and removed from the system. |
Rule
Uninstall httpd Package
[ref] |
The apache2 package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove apache2 | Rationale: | If there is no need to make the web server software available,
removing it provides a safeguard against its activation. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_httpd_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.4, 2.2.10 | |
|
Group
Disable NGINX if Possible
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If NGINX was installed and activated, but the system does not need to act as a web server,
then it should be removed from the system. |
Rule
Uninstall nginx Package
[ref] | The nginx package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove nginx | Rationale: | If there is no need to make the web server software available,
removing it provides a safeguard against its activation. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_nginx_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.10 | |
|
Group
IMAP and POP3 Server
Group contains 2 groups and 2 rules |
[ref]
Dovecot provides IMAP and POP3 services. It is not
installed by default. The project page at
http://www.dovecot.org
contains more detailed information about Dovecot
configuration. |
Group
Disable Cyrus IMAP
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If the system does not need to operate as an IMAP or
POP3 server, the Cyrus IMAP software should be removed. |
Rule
Uninstall cyrus-imapd Package
[ref] | The cyrus-imapd package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove cyrus-imapd | Rationale: | If there is no need to make the cyrus-imapd software available,
removing it provides a safeguard against its activation. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_cyrus-imapd_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.11 | |
|
Group
Disable Dovecot
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If the system does not need to operate as an IMAP or
POP3 server, the dovecot software should be disabled and removed. |
Rule
Uninstall dovecot Package
[ref] |
The dovecot-core package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove dovecot-core | Rationale: | If there is no need to make the Dovecot software available,
removing it provides a safeguard against its activation. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_dovecot_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.11 | |
|
Group
LDAP
Group contains 2 groups and 2 rules |
[ref]
LDAP is a popular directory service, that is, a
standardized way of looking up information from a central database.
Ubuntu 20.04 includes software that enables a system to act as both
an LDAP client and server. |
Group
Configure OpenLDAP Clients
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
This section provides information on which security settings are
important to configure in OpenLDAP clients by manually editing the appropriate
configuration files. Ubuntu 20.04 provides an automated configuration tool called
authconfig and a graphical wrapper for authconfig called
system-config-authentication . However, these tools do not provide as
much control over configuration as manual editing of configuration files. The
authconfig tools do not allow you to specify locations of SSL certificate
files, which is useful when trying to use SSL cleanly across several protocols.
Installation and configuration of OpenLDAP on Ubuntu 20.04 is available at Warning:
Before configuring any system to be an
LDAP client, ensure that a working LDAP server is present on the
network. |
Rule
Ensure LDAP client is not installed
[ref] | The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a service that provides
a method for looking up information from a central database.
The lapd-utils package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove lapd-utils | Rationale: | If the system does not need to act as an LDAP client, it is recommended that the software is removed to reduce the potential attack surface. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_openldap-clients_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.4, 2.3.5 | |
|
Group
Configure OpenLDAP Server
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
This section details some security-relevant settings
for an OpenLDAP server. |
Rule
Uninstall openldap-servers Package
[ref] | The slapd package is not installed by default on a Ubuntu 20.04
system. It is needed only by the OpenLDAP server, not by the
clients which use LDAP for authentication. If the system is not
intended for use as an LDAP Server it should be removed. | Rationale: | Unnecessary packages should not be installed to decrease the attack
surface of the system. While this software is clearly essential on an LDAP
server, it is not necessary on typical desktop or workstation systems. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_openldap-servers_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.4, 2.2.6 | |
|
Group
Mail Server Software
Group contains 1 group and 2 rules |
[ref]
Mail servers are used to send and receive email over the network.
Mail is a very common service, and Mail Transfer Agents (MTAs) are obvious
targets of network attack.
Ensure that systems are not running MTAs unnecessarily,
and configure needed MTAs as defensively as possible.
Very few systems at any site should be configured to directly receive email over the
network. Users should instead use mail client programs to retrieve email
from a central server that supports protocols such as IMAP or POP3.
However, it is normal for most systems to be independently capable of sending email,
for instance so that cron jobs can report output to an administrator.
Most MTAs, including Postfix, support a submission-only mode in which mail can be sent from
the local system to a central site MTA (or directly delivered to a local account),
but the system still cannot receive mail directly over a network.
The alternatives program in Ubuntu 20.04 permits selection of other mail server software
(such as Sendmail), but Postfix is the default and is preferred.
Postfix was coded with security in mind and can also be more effectively contained by
SELinux as its modular design has resulted in separate processes performing specific actions.
More information is available on its website,
http://www.postfix.org. |
Group
Configure SMTP For Mail Clients
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
This section discusses settings for Postfix in a submission-only
e-mail configuration. |
Rule
Disable Postfix Network Listening
[ref] | Edit the file /etc/postfix/main.cf to ensure that only the following
inet_interfaces line appears:
inet_interfaces = loopback-only | Rationale: | This ensures postfix accepts mail messages
(such as cron job reports) from the local system only,
and not from the network, which protects it from network attack. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_postfix_network_listening_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R48), 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000382, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.4, 2.2.15 | |
|
Rule
Ensure Mail Transfer Agent is not Listening on any non-loopback Address
[ref] | Mail Transfer Agents (MTA), such as sendmail and Postfix, are used to
listen for incoming mail and transfer the messages to the appropriate
user or mail server. If the system is not intended to be a mail server,
it is recommended that the MTA be configured to only process local mail. | Rationale: | The software for all Mail Transfer Agents is complex and most have a
long history of security issues. While it is important to ensure that
the system can process local mail messages, it is not necessary to have
the MTA's daemon listening on a port unless the server is intended to
be a mail server that receives and processes mail from other systems. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_has_nonlocal_mta | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.15 | |
|
Group
NFS and RPC
Group contains 2 groups and 2 rules |
[ref]
The Network File System is a popular distributed filesystem for
the Unix environment, and is very widely deployed. This section discusses the
circumstances under which it is possible to disable NFS and its dependencies,
and then details steps which should be taken to secure
NFS's configuration. This section is relevant to systems operating as NFS
clients, as well as to those operating as NFS servers. |
Group
Disable All NFS Services if Possible
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
If there is not a reason for the system to operate as either an
NFS client or an NFS server, follow all instructions in this section to disable
subsystems required by NFS. Warning:
The steps in this section will prevent a system
from operating as either an NFS client or an NFS server. Only perform these
steps on systems which do not need NFS at all. |
Group
Disable Services Used Only by NFS
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If NFS is not needed, disable the NFS client daemons nfslock, rpcgssd, and rpcidmapd.
All of these daemons run with elevated privileges, and many listen for network
connections. If they are not needed, they should be disabled to improve system
security posture. |
Rule
Uninstall rpcbind Package
[ref] | The rpcbind utility maps RPC services to the ports on which they listen.
RPC processes notify rpcbind when they start, registering the ports they
are listening on and the RPC program numbers they expect to serve. The
rpcbind service redirects the client to the proper port number so it can
communicate with the requested service. If the system does not require RPC
(such as for NFS servers) then this service should be disabled.
The rpcbind package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove rpcbind | Rationale: | If the system does not require rpc based services, it is recommended that
rpcbind be disabled to reduce the attack surface. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_rpcbind_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.3.6 | |
|
Rule
Uninstall nfs-kernel-server Package
[ref] | The nfs-kernel-server package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove nfs-kernel-server | Rationale: | If the system does not export NFS shares or act as an NFS client, it is
recommended that these services be removed to reduce the remote attack
surface. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_nfs-kernel-server_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.7 | |
|
Group
Network Time Protocol
Group contains 8 rules |
[ref]
The Network Time Protocol is used to manage the system
clock over a network. Computer clocks are not very accurate, so
time will drift unpredictably on unmanaged systems. Central time
protocols can be used both to ensure that time is consistent among
a network of systems, and that their time is consistent with the
outside world.
If every system on a network reliably reports the same time, then it is much
easier to correlate log messages in case of an attack. In addition, a number of
cryptographic protocols (such as Kerberos) use timestamps to prevent certain
types of attacks. If your network does not have synchronized time, these
protocols may be unreliable or even unusable.
Depending on the specifics of the network, global time accuracy may be just as
important as local synchronization, or not very important at all. If your
network is connected to the Internet, using a public timeserver (or one
provided by your enterprise) provides globally accurate timestamps which may be
essential in investigating or responding to an attack which originated outside
of your network.
A typical network setup involves a small number of internal systems operating
as NTP servers, and the remainder obtaining time information from those
internal servers.
There is a choice between the daemons ntpd and chronyd , which
are available from the repositories in the ntp and chrony
packages respectively.
The default chronyd daemon can work well when external time references
are only intermittently accesible, can perform well even when the network is
congested for longer periods of time, can usually synchronize the clock faster
and with better time accuracy, and quickly adapts to sudden changes in the rate
of the clock, for example, due to changes in the temperature of the crystal
oscillator. Chronyd should be considered for all systems which are
frequently suspended or otherwise intermittently disconnected and reconnected
to a network. Mobile and virtual systems for example.
The ntpd NTP daemon fully supports NTP protocol version 4 (RFC 5905),
including broadcast, multicast, manycast clients and servers, and the orphan
mode. It also supports extra authentication schemes based on public-key
cryptography (RFC 5906). The NTP daemon ( ntpd ) should be considered
for systems which are normally kept permanently on. Systems which are required
to use broadcast or multicast IP, or to perform authentication of packets with
the Autokey protocol, should consider using ntpd .
Refer to
https://help.ubuntu.com/lts/serverguide/NTP.html
for more detailed comparison of features of chronyd
and ntpd daemon features respectively, and for further guidance how to
choose between the two NTP daemons.
The upstream manual pages at
http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/manual.html for
chronyd and
http://www.ntp.org for ntpd provide additional
information on the capabilities and configuration of each of the NTP daemons. |
Rule
The Chrony package is installed
[ref] | System time should be synchronized between all systems in an environment. This is
typically done by establishing an authoritative time server or set of servers and having all
systems synchronize their clocks to them.
The chrony package can be installed with the following command:
$ apt-get install chrony | Rationale: | Time synchronization is important to support time sensitive security mechanisms like
Kerberos and also ensures log files have consistent time records across the enterprise,
which aids in forensic investigations. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_chrony_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R43), 0988, 1405, FMT_SMF_EXT.1, Req-10.4, 10.6.1, SRG-OS-000355-GPOS-00143, UBTU-20-010435, 2.2.1.1 | |
|
Rule
The Chronyd service is enabled
[ref] | chrony is a daemon which implements the Network Time Protocol (NTP) is designed to
synchronize system clocks across a variety of systems and use a source that is highly
accurate. More information on chrony can be found at
http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/.
Chrony can be configured to be a client and/or a server.
To enable Chronyd service, you can run:
# systemctl enable chronyd.service
This recommendation only applies if chrony is in use on the system. | Rationale: | If chrony is in use on the system proper configuration is vital to ensuring time
synchronization is working properly. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_chronyd_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
0988, 1405, SRG-OS-000355-GPOS-00143, 2.2.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Enable the NTP Daemon
[ref] |
The ntp service can be enabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl enable ntp.service | Rationale: | Enabling the ntp service ensures that the ntp
service will be running and that the system will synchronize its time to
any servers specified. This is important whether the system is configured to be
a client (and synchronize only its own clock) or it is also acting as an NTP
server to other systems. Synchronizing time is essential for authentication
services such as Kerberos, but it is also important for maintaining accurate
logs and auditing possible security breaches.
The NTP daemon offers all of the functionality of ntpdate , which is now
deprecated. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_ntp_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
NT012(R03), 1, 14, 15, 16, 3, 5, 6, APO11.04, BAI03.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, CCI-000160, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, CM-6(a), AU-8(1)(a), PR.PT-1, Req-10.4, 10.6.1, 2.2.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Enable systemd_timesyncd Service
[ref] |
The systemd_timesyncd service can be enabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl enable systemd_timesyncd.service | Rationale: | Enabling the systemd_timesyncd service ensures that this host
uses the ntp protocol to fetch time data from a ntp server.
Synchronizing time is essential for authentication
services such as Kerberos, but it is also important for maintaining accurate
logs and auditing possible security breaches.
Additional information on Ubuntu network time protocol is
available at
https://help.ubuntu.com/lts/serverguide/NTP.html.en. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_timesyncd_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
NT012(R03), 1, 14, 15, 16, 3, 5, 6, APO11.04, BAI03.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, CCI-000160, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, CM-6(a), AU-8(1)(a), PR.PT-1, Req-10.4, 10.6.1, 2.2.1.2 | |
|
Rule
Ensure that chronyd is running under chrony user account
[ref] | chrony is a daemon which implements the Network Time Protocol (NTP). It is designed to
synchronize system clocks across a variety of systems and use a source that is highly
accurate. More information on chrony can be found at
http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/.
Chrony can be configured to be a client and/or a server.
To ensure that chronyd is running under chrony user account,
user variable in /etc/chrony/chrony.conf is set to _chrony or is
absent:
user _chrony
This recommendation only applies if chrony is in use on the system. | Rationale: | If chrony is in use on the system proper configuration is vital to ensuring time synchronization
is working properly. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_chronyd_run_as_chrony_user | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.1.3 | |
|
Rule
A remote time server for Chrony is configured
[ref] | Chrony is a daemon which implements the Network Time Protocol (NTP). It is designed to
synchronize system clocks across a variety of systems and use a source that is highly
accurate. More information on chrony can be found at
http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/.
Chrony can be configured to be a client and/or a server.
Add or edit server or pool lines to /etc/chrony/chrony.conf as appropriate:
server <remote-server>
Multiple servers may be configured. | Rationale: | If chrony is in use on the system proper configuration is vital to ensuring time
synchronization is working properly. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_chronyd_specify_remote_server | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R43), CCI-000160, CCI-001891, 0988, 1405, CM-6(a), AU-8(1)(a), Req-10.4.3, 10.6.2, 2.2.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Configure server restrictions for ntpd
[ref] | ntpd is a daemon which implements the Network Time Protocol (NTP). It is designed to
synchronize system clocks across a variety of systems and use a source that is highly
accurate. More information on NTP can be found at
http://www.ntp.org.
ntp can be configured to be a client and/or a server.
To ensure that ntpd implements correct server restrictions, make sure that the following lines exist in the file /etc/ntpd.conf :
restrict -4 default kod nomodify notrap nopeer noquery
restrict -6 default kod nomodify notrap nopeer noquery
This recommendation only applies if ntp is in use on the system. | Rationale: | If ntp is in use on the system proper configuration is vital to ensuring time synchronization
is working properly. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_ntpd_configure_restrictions | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.1.4 | |
|
Rule
Configure ntpd To Run As ntp User
[ref] | ntp is a daemon which implements the Network Time Protocol (NTP). It is designed to
synchronize system clocks across a variety of systems and use a source that is highly
accurate. More information on NTP can be found at
http://www.ntp.org.
ntp can be configured to be a client and/or a server.
To ensure that ntpd is running as ntp user, Add or edit the
OPTIONS variable in /etc/sysconfig/ntpd to include ' -u ntp:ntp ':
OPTIONS="-u ntp:ntp"
This recommendation only applies if ntp is in use on the system. | Rationale: | If ntp is in use on the system proper configuration is vital to ensuring time synchronization
is working properly. Running ntpd under dedicated user accounts limits the attack surface for
potential attacker exploiting security flaws in the daemon or the protocol. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_ntpd_run_as_ntp_user | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.1.4 | |
|
Group
Obsolete Services
Group contains 4 groups and 6 rules |
[ref]
This section discusses a number of network-visible
services which have historically caused problems for system
security, and for which disabling or severely limiting the service
has been the best available guidance for some time. As a result of
this, many of these services are not installed as part of Ubuntu 20.04
by default.
Organizations which are running these services should
switch to more secure equivalents as soon as possible.
If it remains absolutely necessary to run one of
these services for legacy reasons, care should be taken to restrict
the service as much as possible, for instance by configuring host
firewall software such as iptables to restrict access to the
vulnerable service to only those remote hosts which have a known
need to use it. |
Group
Xinetd
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The xinetd service acts as a dedicated listener for some
network services (mostly, obsolete ones) and can be used to provide access
controls and perform some logging. It has been largely obsoleted by other
features, and it is not installed by default. The older Inetd service
is not even available as part of Ubuntu 20.04. |
Rule
Uninstall xinetd Package
[ref] | The xinetd package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove xinetd | Rationale: | Removing the xinetd package decreases the risk of the
xinetd service's accidental (or intentional) activation. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_xinetd_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R1), 11, 12, 14, 15, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000305, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-3, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, 2.2.4, 2.1.1 | |
|
Group
Rlogin, Rsh, and Rexec
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
The Berkeley r-commands are legacy services which
allow cleartext remote access and have an insecure trust
model. |
Rule
Uninstall rsh Package
[ref] |
The rsh-client package contains the client commands
for the rsh services | Rationale: | These legacy clients contain numerous security exposures and have
been replaced with the more secure SSH package. Even if the server is removed,
it is best to ensure the clients are also removed to prevent users from
inadvertently attempting to use these commands and therefore exposing
their credentials. Note that removing the rsh-client package removes
the clients for rsh ,rcp , and rlogin . | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_rsh_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R1), 3.1.13, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), A.8.2.3, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, 2.2.4, 2.3.2 | |
|
Rule
Remove Rsh Trust Files
[ref] | The files /etc/hosts.equiv and ~/.rhosts (in
each user's home directory) list remote hosts and users that are trusted by the
local system when using the rshd daemon.
To remove these files, run the following command to delete them from any
location:
$ sudo rm /etc/hosts.equiv
$ rm ~/.rhosts | Rationale: | This action is only meaningful if .rhosts support is permitted
through PAM. Trust files are convenient, but when used in conjunction with
the R-services, they can allow unauthenticated access to a system. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_no_rsh_trust_files | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 12, 14, 15, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-001436, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-3, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, 6.2.11 | |
|
Group
Chat/Messaging Services
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The talk software makes it possible for users to send and receive messages
across systems through a terminal session. |
Rule
Uninstall talk Package
[ref] | The talk package contains the client program for the
Internet talk protocol, which allows the user to chat with other users on
different systems. Talk is a communication program which copies lines from one
terminal to the terminal of another user.
The talk package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove talk | Rationale: | The talk software presents a security risk as it uses unencrypted protocols
for communications. Removing the talk package decreases the
risk of the accidental (or intentional) activation of talk client program. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_talk_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R1), 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 2.2.4, 2.3.3 | |
|
Group
Telnet
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The telnet protocol does not provide confidentiality or integrity
for information transmitted on the network. This includes authentication
information such as passwords. Organizations which use telnet should be
actively working to migrate to a more secure protocol. |
Rule
Remove telnet Clients
[ref] | The telnet client allows users to start connections to other systems via
the telnet protocol. | Rationale: | The telnet protocol is insecure and unencrypted. The use
of an unencrypted transmission medium could allow an unauthorized user
to steal credentials. The ssh package provides an
encrypted session and stronger security and is included in Ubuntu 20.04. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_telnet_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R1), 3.1.13, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), A.8.2.3, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, 2.2.4, 2.3.4 | |
|
Rule
Uninstall rsync Package
[ref] | The rsyncd service can be used to synchronize files between systems over network links.
The rsync package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove rsync | Rationale: | The rsyncd service presents a security risk as it uses unencrypted protocols for
communication. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_rsync_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.16 | |
|
Group
Print Support
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
The Common Unix Printing System (CUPS) service provides both local
and network printing support. A system running the CUPS service can accept
print jobs from other systems, process them, and send them to the appropriate
printer. It also provides an interface for remote administration through a web
browser. The CUPS service is installed and activated by default. The project
homepage and more detailed documentation are available at
http://www.cups.org.
|
Rule
Uninstall CUPS Package
[ref] | The cups package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove cups | Rationale: | If the system does not need to print jobs or accept print jobs from other systems, it is
recommended that CUPS be removed to reduce the potential attack surface. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_cups_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.4 | |
|
Rule
Disable the CUPS Service
[ref] |
The cups service can be disabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl mask --now cups.service | Rationale: | Turn off unneeded services to reduce attack surface. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_cups_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, 2.2.4, 2.2.4 | |
|
Group
Proxy Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
A proxy server is a very desirable target for a
potential adversary because much (or all) sensitive data for a
given infrastructure may flow through it. Therefore, if one is
required, the system acting as a proxy server should be dedicated
to that purpose alone and be stored in a physically secure
location. The system's default proxy server software is Squid, and
provided in an RPM package of the same name. |
Group
Disable Squid if Possible
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If Squid was installed and activated, but the system
does not need to act as a proxy server, then it should be disabled
and removed. |
Rule
Uninstall squid Package
[ref] | The squid package can be removed with the following command: $ apt-get remove squid | Rationale: | If there is no need to make the proxy server software available,
removing it provides a safeguard against its activation. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_squid_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.13 | |
|
Group
Samba(SMB) Microsoft Windows File Sharing Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
When properly configured, the Samba service allows
Linux systems to provide file and print sharing to Microsoft
Windows systems. There are two software packages that provide
Samba support. The first, samba-client , provides a series of
command line tools that enable a client system to access Samba
shares. The second, simply labeled samba , provides the Samba
service. It is this second package that allows a Linux system to
act as an Active Directory server, a domain controller, or as a
domain member. Only the samba-client package is installed by
default. |
Group
Disable Samba if Possible
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
Even after the Samba server package has been installed, it
will remain disabled. Do not enable this service unless it is
absolutely necessary to provide Microsoft Windows file and print
sharing functionality. |
Rule
Uninstall Samba Package
[ref] | The samba package can be removed with the following command: $ apt-get remove samba | Rationale: | If there is no need to make the Samba software available,
removing it provides a safeguard against its activation. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_samba_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.4, 2.2.12 | |
|
Group
SNMP Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
The Simple Network Management Protocol allows
administrators to monitor the state of network devices, including
computers. Older versions of SNMP were well-known for weak
security, such as plaintext transmission of the community string
(used for authentication) and usage of easily-guessable
choices for the community string. |
Group
Disable SNMP Server if Possible
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The system includes an SNMP daemon that allows for its remote
monitoring, though it not installed by default. If it was installed and
activated but is not needed, the software should be disabled and removed. |
Rule
Uninstall net-snmp Package
[ref] |
The snmp package provides the snmpd service.
The snmp package can be removed with the following command:
$ apt-get remove snmp | Rationale: | If there is no need to run SNMP server software,
removing the package provides a safeguard against its
activation. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_net-snmp_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.4, 2.2.14 | |
|
Group
SSH Server
Group contains 1 group and 23 rules |
[ref]
The SSH protocol is recommended for remote login and
remote file transfer. SSH provides confidentiality and integrity
for data exchanged between two systems, as well as server
authentication, through the use of public key cryptography. The
implementation included with the system is called OpenSSH, and more
detailed documentation is available from its website,
https://www.openssh.com.
Its server program is called sshd and provided by the RPM package
openssh-server . |
Group
Configure OpenSSH Server if Necessary
Group contains 18 rules |
[ref]
If the system needs to act as an SSH server, then
certain changes should be made to the OpenSSH daemon configuration
file /etc/ssh/sshd_config . The following recommendations can be
applied to this file. See the sshd_config(5) man page for more
detailed information. |
Rule
Set SSH Client Alive Count Max
[ref] | The SSH server sends at most ClientAliveCountMax messages
during a SSH session and waits for a response from the SSH client.
The option ClientAliveInterval configures timeout after
each ClientAliveCountMax message. If the SSH server does not
receive a response from the client, then the connection is considered unresponsive
and terminated.
For SSH earlier than v8.2, a ClientAliveCountMax value of 0
causes a timeout precisely when the ClientAliveInterval is set.
Starting with v8.2, a value of 0 disables the timeout functionality
completely. If the option is set to a number greater than 0 , then
the session will be disconnected after
ClientAliveInterval * ClientAliveCountMax seconds without receiving
a keep alive message. | Rationale: | This ensures a user login will be terminated as soon as the ClientAliveInterval
is reached. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_set_keepalive | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R29), 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 7, 8, 5.5.6, APO13.01, BAI03.01, BAI03.02, BAI03.03, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.1.11, CCI-000879, CCI-001133, CCI-002361, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 6.2, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.3, A.14.1.1, A.14.2.1, A.14.2.5, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.6.1.5, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-004-6 R2.2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.1, CIP-007-3 R5.3.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.3, AC-2(5), AC-12, AC-17(a), SC-10, CM-6(a), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.IP-2, Req-8.1.8, 8.2.8, SRG-OS-000163-GPOS-00072, SRG-OS-000279-GPOS-00109, UBTU-20-010036, 5.2.15 | |
|
Rule
Set SSH Client Alive Interval
[ref] | SSH allows administrators to set a network responsiveness timeout interval.
After this interval has passed, the unresponsive client will be automatically logged out.
To set this timeout interval, edit the following line in /etc/ssh/sshd_config as
follows:
ClientAliveInterval 300
The timeout interval is given in seconds. For example, have a timeout
of 10 minutes, set interval to 600.
If a shorter timeout has already been set for the login shell, that value will
preempt any SSH setting made in /etc/ssh/sshd_config . Keep in mind that
some processes may stop SSH from correctly detecting that the user is idle. Warning:
SSH disconnecting unresponsive clients will not have desired effect without also
configuring ClientAliveCountMax in the SSH service configuration. Warning:
Following conditions may prevent the SSH session to time out:
- Remote processes on the remote machine generates output. As the output has to be transferred over the network to the client, the timeout is reset every time such transfer happens.
- Any
scp or sftp activity by the same user to the host resets the timeout.
| Rationale: | Terminating an idle ssh session within a short time period reduces the window of
opportunity for unauthorized personnel to take control of a management session
enabled on the console or console port that has been let unattended. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_set_idle_timeout | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R29), 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 7, 8, 5.5.6, APO13.01, BAI03.01, BAI03.02, BAI03.03, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.1.11, CCI-000879, CCI-001133, CCI-002361, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 6.2, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.3, A.14.1.1, A.14.2.1, A.14.2.5, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.6.1.5, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-004-6 R2.2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.1, CIP-007-3 R5.3.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.3, CM-6(a), AC-17(a), AC-2(5), AC-12, AC-17(a), SC-10, CM-6(a), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.IP-2, Req-8.1.8, 8.2.8, SRG-OS-000126-GPOS-00066, SRG-OS-000163-GPOS-00072, SRG-OS-000279-GPOS-00109, SRG-OS-000395-GPOS-00175, UBTU-20-010037, 5.2.15 | |
|
Rule
Disable Host-Based Authentication
[ref] | SSH's cryptographic host-based authentication is
more secure than .rhosts authentication. However, it is
not recommended that hosts unilaterally trust one another, even
within an organization.
The default SSH configuration disables host-based authentication. The appropriate
configuration is used if no value is set for HostbasedAuthentication .
To explicitly disable host-based authentication, add or correct the
following line in
/etc/ssh/sshd_config :
HostbasedAuthentication no | Rationale: | SSH trust relationships mean a compromise on one host
can allow an attacker to move trivially to other hosts. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_disable_host_auth | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 9, 5.5.6, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, 3.1.12, CCI-000366, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, 0421, 0422, 0431, 0974, 1173, 1401, 1504, 1505, 1546, 1557, 1558, 1559, 1560, 1561, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.2.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CIP-007-3 R5.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.1, CIP-007-3 R5.3.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.3, AC-3, AC-17(a), CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, FIA_UAU.1, 8.3.1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00229, 5.2.8 | |
|
Rule
Disable SSH Access via Empty Passwords
[ref] | Disallow SSH login with empty passwords.
The default SSH configuration disables logins with empty passwords. The appropriate
configuration is used if no value is set for PermitEmptyPasswords .
To explicitly disallow SSH login from accounts with empty passwords,
add or correct the following line in
/etc/ssh/sshd_config :
PermitEmptyPasswords no
Any accounts with empty passwords should be disabled immediately, and PAM configuration
should prevent users from being able to assign themselves empty passwords. | Rationale: | Configuring this setting for the SSH daemon provides additional assurance
that remote login via SSH will require a password, even in the event of
misconfiguration elsewhere. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_disable_empty_passwords | Identifiers and References | References:
NT007(R17), 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 9, 5.5.6, APO01.06, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, 3.1.1, 3.1.5, CCI-000366, CCI-000766, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 5.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-17(a), CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, FIA_UAU.1, Req-2.2.4, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000106-GPOS-00053, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00229, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, UBTU-20-010047, 5.2.10 | |
|
Rule
Disable SSH Support for .rhosts Files
[ref] | SSH can emulate the behavior of the obsolete rsh
command in allowing users to enable insecure access to their
accounts via .rhosts files.
The default SSH configuration disables support for .rhosts . The appropriate
configuration is used if no value is set for IgnoreRhosts .
To explicitly disable support for .rhosts files, add or correct the following line in
/etc/ssh/sshd_config :
IgnoreRhosts yes | Rationale: | SSH trust relationships mean a compromise on one host
can allow an attacker to move trivially to other hosts. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_disable_rhosts | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 9, 5.5.6, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, 3.1.12, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-17(a), CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, FIA_UAU.1, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.2.7 | |
|
Rule
Disable SSH Root Login
[ref] | The root user should never be allowed to login to a
system directly over a network.
To disable root login via SSH, add or correct the following line in
/etc/ssh/sshd_config :
PermitRootLogin no | Rationale: | Even though the communications channel may be encrypted, an additional layer of
security is gained by extending the policy of not logging directly on as root.
In addition, logging in with a user-specific account provides individual
accountability of actions performed on the system and also helps to minimize
direct attack attempts on root's password. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_disable_root_login | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R19), NT007(R21), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.6, APO01.06, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.02, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, DSS06.10, 3.1.1, 3.1.5, CCI-000366, CCI-000770, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.2.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CIP-007-3 R5.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.1, CIP-007-3 R5.3.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.3, AC-6(2), AC-17(a), IA-2, IA-2(5), CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-3, FAU_GEN.1, Req-2.2.4, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000109-GPOS-00056, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.2.9 | |
|
Rule
Do Not Allow SSH Environment Options
[ref] | Ensure that users are not able to override environment variables of the SSH daemon.
The default SSH configuration disables environment processing. The appropriate
configuration is used if no value is set for PermitUserEnvironment .
To explicitly disable Environment options, add or correct the following
/etc/ssh/sshd_config :
PermitUserEnvironment no | Rationale: | SSH environment options potentially allow users to bypass
access restriction in some configurations. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_do_not_permit_user_env | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 3, 9, 5.5.6, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, 3.1.12, CCI-000366, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, AC-17(a), CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, Req-2.2.4, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00229, UBTU-20-010047, 5.2.11 | |
|
Rule
Enable PAM
[ref] | UsePAM Enables the Pluggable Authentication Module interface. If set to “yes” this will
enable PAM authentication using ChallengeResponseAuthentication and
PasswordAuthentication in addition to PAM account and session module processing for all
authentication types.
To enable PAM authentication, add or correct the following line in
/etc/ssh/sshd_config :
UsePAM yes | Rationale: | When UsePAM is set to yes, PAM runs through account and session types properly. This is
important if you want to restrict access to services based off of IP, time or other factors of
the account. Additionally, you can make sure users inherit certain environment variables
on login or disallow access to the server. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_enable_pam | Identifiers and References | References:
CCI-000877, 2.2.4, SRG-OS-000125-GPOS-00065, UBTU-20-010035, 5.2.19 | |
|
Rule
Enable SSH Warning Banner
[ref] | To enable the warning banner and ensure it is consistent
across the system, add or correct the following line in
/etc/ssh/sshd_config :
Banner /etc/issue.net
Another section contains information on how to create an
appropriate system-wide warning banner. | Rationale: | The warning message reinforces policy awareness during the logon process and
facilitates possible legal action against attackers. Alternatively, systems
whose ownership should not be obvious should ensure usage of a banner that does
not provide easy attribution. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_enable_warning_banner_net | Identifiers and References | References:
5.5.6, DSS05.04, DSS05.10, DSS06.10, 3.1.9, CCI-000048, CCI-000050, CCI-001384, CCI-001385, CCI-001386, CCI-001387, CCI-001388, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, A.18.1.4, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.4, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, AC-8(a), AC-8(c), AC-17(a), CM-6(a), PR.AC-7, FTA_TAB.1, SRG-OS-000023-GPOS-00006, SRG-OS-000228-GPOS-00088, UBTU-20-010038, 5.2.18 | |
|
Rule
Limit Users' SSH Access
[ref] | By default, the SSH configuration allows any user with an account
to access the system. There are several options available to limit
which users and group can access the system via SSH. It is
recommended that at least one of the following options be leveraged:
- AllowUsers variable gives the system administrator the option of
allowing specific users to ssh into the system. The list consists of
space separated user names. Numeric user IDs are not recognized with
this variable. If a system administrator wants to restrict user
access further by specifically allowing a user's access only from a
particular host, the entry can be specified in the form of user@host.
- AllowGroups variable gives the system administrator the option of
allowing specific groups of users to ssh into the system. The list
consists of space separated group names. Numeric group IDs are not
recognized with this variable.
- DenyUsers variable gives the system administrator the option of
denying specific users to ssh into the system. The list consists of
space separated user names. Numeric user IDs are not recognized with
this variable. If a system administrator wants to restrict user
access further by specifically denying a user's access from a
particular host, the entry can be specified in the form of user@host.
- DenyGroups variable gives the system administrator the option of
denying specific groups of users to ssh into the system. The list
consists of space separated group names. Numeric group IDs are not
recognized with this variable. | Rationale: | Specifying which accounts are allowed SSH access into the system reduces the
possibility of unauthorized access to the system. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_limit_user_access | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, 3.1.12, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.2.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, CIP-007-3 R5.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.1, CIP-007-3 R5.3.2, CIP-007-3 R5.3.3, AC-3, CM-6(a), PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.PT-3, Req-2.2.4, 2.2.6, 5.2.17 | |
|
Rule
Ensure SSH LoginGraceTime is configured
[ref] | The LoginGraceTime parameter to the SSH server specifies the time allowed for successful authentication to
the SSH server. The longer the Grace period is the more open unauthenticated connections
can exist. Like other session controls in this session the Grace Period should be limited to
appropriate limits to ensure the service is available for needed access. | Rationale: | Setting the LoginGraceTime parameter to a low number will minimize the risk of successful
brute force attacks to the SSH server. It will also limit the number of concurrent
unauthenticated connections. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_set_login_grace_time | Identifiers and References | References:
5.2.16 | |
|
Rule
Set LogLevel to INFO
[ref] | The INFO parameter specifices that record login and logout activity will be logged.
The default SSH configuration sets the log level to INFO. The appropriate
configuration is used if no value is set for LogLevel .
To explicitly specify the log level in SSH, add or correct the following line in
/etc/ssh/sshd_config :
LogLevel INFO | Rationale: | SSH provides several logging levels with varying amounts of verbosity. DEBUG is specifically
not recommended other than strictly for debugging SSH communications since it provides
so much data that it is difficult to identify important security information. INFO level is the
basic level that only records login activity of SSH users. In many situations, such as Incident
Response, it is important to determine when a particular user was active on a system. The
logout record can eliminate those users who disconnected, which helps narrow the field. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_set_loglevel_info | Identifiers and References | References:
AC-17(a), CM-6(a), 5.2.4 | |
|
Rule
Set SSH authentication attempt limit
[ref] | The MaxAuthTries parameter specifies the maximum number of authentication attempts
permitted per connection. Once the number of failures reaches half this value, additional failures are logged.
to set MaxAUthTries edit /etc/ssh/sshd_config as follows:
MaxAuthTries 4 | Rationale: | Setting the MaxAuthTries parameter to a low number will minimize the risk of successful
brute force attacks to the SSH server. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_set_max_auth_tries | Identifiers and References | References:
0421, 0422, 0431, 0974, 1173, 1401, 1504, 1505, 1546, 1557, 1558, 1559, 1560, 1561, 2.2.6, 5.2.6 | |
|
Rule
Set SSH MaxSessions limit
[ref] | The MaxSessions parameter specifies the maximum number of open sessions permitted
from a given connection. To set MaxSessions edit
/etc/ssh/sshd_config as follows: MaxSessions 10 | Rationale: | To protect a system from denial of service due to a large number of concurrent
sessions, use the rate limiting function of MaxSessions to protect availability
of sshd logins and prevent overwhelming the daemon. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_set_max_sessions | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.6, 5.2.22 | |
|
Rule
Ensure SSH MaxStartups is configured
[ref] | The MaxStartups parameter specifies the maximum number of concurrent
unauthenticated connections to the SSH daemon. Additional connections will be
dropped until authentication succeeds or the LoginGraceTime expires for a
connection. To confgure MaxStartups, you should add or correct the following
line in the
/etc/ssh/sshd_config file:
MaxStartups 10:30:60
CIS recommends a MaxStartups value of '10:30:60', or more restrictive where
dictated by site policy. | Rationale: | To protect a system from denial of service due to a large number of pending
authentication connection attempts, use the rate limiting function of MaxStartups
to protect availability of sshd logins and prevent overwhelming the daemon. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_set_maxstartups | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.6, 5.2.21 | |
|
Rule
Use Only FIPS 140-2 Validated Ciphers
[ref] | Limit the ciphers to those algorithms which are FIPS-approved.
Counter (CTR) mode is also preferred over cipher-block chaining (CBC) mode.
The following line in /etc/ssh/sshd_config
demonstrates use of FIPS-approved ciphers:
Ciphers aes128-ctr,aes192-ctr,aes256-ctr,aes128-cbc,3des-cbc,aes192-cbc,aes256-cbc
The man page sshd_config(5) contains a list of supported ciphers.
The rule is parametrized to use the following ciphers: aes128-ctr,aes192-ctr,aes256-ctr,aes128-cbc,3des-cbc,aes192-cbc,aes256-cbc,rijndael-cbc@lysator.liu.se . Warning:
The system needs to be rebooted for these changes to take effect. Warning:
System Crypto Modules must be provided by a vendor that undergoes
FIPS-140 certifications.
FIPS-140 is applicable to all Federal agencies that use
cryptographic-based security systems to protect sensitive information
in computer and telecommunication systems (including voice systems) as
defined in Section 5131 of the Information Technology Management Reform
Act of 1996, Public Law 104-106. This standard shall be used in
designing and implementing cryptographic modules that Federal
departments and agencies operate or are operated for them under
contract. See https://nvlpubs.nist.gov/nistpubs/FIPS/NIST.FIPS.140-2.pdf
To meet this, the system has to have cryptographic software provided by
a vendor that has undergone this certification. This means providing
documentation, test results, design information, and independent third
party review by an accredited lab. While open source software is
capable of meeting this, it does not meet FIPS-140 unless the vendor
submits to this process. | Rationale: | Unapproved mechanisms that are used for authentication to the cryptographic module are not verified and therefore
cannot be relied upon to provide confidentiality or integrity, and system data may be compromised.
Operating systems utilizing encryption are required to use FIPS-compliant mechanisms for authenticating to
cryptographic modules.
FIPS 140-2 is the current standard for validating that mechanisms used to access cryptographic modules
utilize authentication that meets industry and government requirements. For government systems, this allows
Security Levels 1, 2, 3, or 4 for use on Ubuntu 20.04. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_use_approved_ciphers | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 5.5.6, APO11.04, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, DSS06.10, MEA02.01, 3.1.13, 3.13.11, 3.13.8, CCI-000068, CCI-000366, CCI-000803, CCI-000877, CCI-002890, CCI-003123, 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(2), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(i), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 164.314(b)(2)(i), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-17(a), AC-17(2), SC-13, MA-4(6), IA-5(1)(c), SC-12(2), SC-12(3), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-3, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, 2.2.7, SRG-OS-000033-GPOS-00014, SRG-OS-000120-GPOS-00061, SRG-OS-000125-GPOS-00065, SRG-OS-000250-GPOS-00093, SRG-OS-000393-GPOS-00173, SRG-OS-000394-GPOS-00174, 5.2.12 | |
|
Rule
Use Only FIPS 140-2 Validated MACs
[ref] | Limit the MACs to those hash algorithms which are FIPS-approved.
The following line in /etc/ssh/sshd_config
demonstrates use of FIPS-approved MACs:
MACs hmac-sha2-512,hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1
The man page sshd_config(5) contains a list of supported MACs.
The rule is parametrized to use the following MACs: hmac-sha2-512,hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-etm@openssh.com,hmac-sha2-256-etm@openssh.com,hmac-sha2-512-etm@openssh.com . Warning:
The system needs to be rebooted for these changes to take effect. Warning:
System Crypto Modules must be provided by a vendor that undergoes
FIPS-140 certifications.
FIPS-140 is applicable to all Federal agencies that use
cryptographic-based security systems to protect sensitive information
in computer and telecommunication systems (including voice systems) as
defined in Section 5131 of the Information Technology Management Reform
Act of 1996, Public Law 104-106. This standard shall be used in
designing and implementing cryptographic modules that Federal
departments and agencies operate or are operated for them under
contract. See https://nvlpubs.nist.gov/nistpubs/FIPS/NIST.FIPS.140-2.pdf
To meet this, the system has to have cryptographic software provided by
a vendor that has undergone this certification. This means providing
documentation, test results, design information, and independent third
party review by an accredited lab. While open source software is
capable of meeting this, it does not meet FIPS-140 unless the vendor
submits to this process. | Rationale: | DoD Information Systems are required to use FIPS-approved cryptographic hash
functions. The only SSHv2 hash algorithms meeting this requirement is SHA2. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_use_approved_macs | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 13, 15, 16, 5, 8, APO01.06, APO13.01, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.03, 3.1.13, 3.13.11, 3.13.8, CCI-000068, CCI-000803, CCI-000877, CCI-001453, CCI-003123, 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(2), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(i), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 164.314(b)(2)(i), 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.6.6, SR 1.1, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.6, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.11.2.6, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-17(a), AC-17(2), SC-13, MA-4(6), SC-12(2), SC-12(3), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-3, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-4, 2.2.7, SRG-OS-000125-GPOS-00065, SRG-OS-000250-GPOS-00093, SRG-OS-000394-GPOS-00174, 5.2.13 | |
|
Rule
Use Only Strong Key Exchange algorithms
[ref] | Limit the Key Exchange to strong algorithms.
The following line in /etc/ssh/sshd_config demonstrates use
of those:
KexAlgorithms ecdh-sha2-nistp256,ecdh-sha2-nistp384,ecdh-sha2-nistp521,diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha256,diffie-hellman-group16-sha512,diffie-hellman-group18-sha512,diffie-hellman-group14-sha256 | Rationale: | Key exchange is any method in cryptography by which cryptographic keys are exchanged
between two parties, allowing use of a cryptographic algorithm. If the sender and receiver
wish to exchange encrypted messages, each must be equipped to encrypt messages to be
sent and decrypt messages received | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_use_strong_kex | Identifiers and References | References:
Req-2.3, 2.2.7, 5.2.14 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns SSH Server config file
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/ssh/sshd_config , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/ssh/sshd_config | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective
services that if configured incorrectly can lead to insecure and vulnerable
configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_sshd_config | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, AC-17(a), CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.2.1 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on SSH Server config file
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/ssh/sshd_config , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/ssh/sshd_config | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective
services that if configured incorrectly can lead to insecure and vulnerable
configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_sshd_config | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, AC-17(a), CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.2.1 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on SSH Server config file
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/ssh/sshd_config , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0600 /etc/ssh/sshd_config | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective
services that if configured incorrectly can lead to insecure and vulnerable
configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_sshd_config | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, AC-17(a), CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.2.1 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on SSH Server Private *_key Key Files
[ref] | SSH server private keys - files that match the /etc/ssh/*_key glob, have to have restricted permissions.
If those files are owned by the root user and the root group, they have to have the 0600 permission or stricter. | Rationale: | If an unauthorized user obtains the private SSH host key file, the host could be
impersonated. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_sshd_private_key | Identifiers and References | References:
BP28(R36), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.1.13, 3.13.10, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, AC-17(a), CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-2.2.4, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.2.2 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on SSH Server Public *.pub Key Files
[ref] | To properly set the permissions of /etc/ssh/*.pub , run the command: $ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/ssh/*.pub | Rationale: | If a public host key file is modified by an unauthorized user, the SSH service
may be compromised. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_sshd_pub_key | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.1.13, 3.13.10, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CIP-003-8 R5.1.1, CIP-003-8 R5.3, CIP-004-6 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R2.1, CIP-007-3 R2.2, CIP-007-3 R2.3, CIP-007-3 R5.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.1, CIP-007-3 R5.1.2, AC-17(a), CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-2.2.4, 2.2.6, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 5.2.3 | |
|
Group
X Window System
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
The X Window System implementation included with the
system is called X.org. |
Group
Disable X Windows
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
Unless there is a mission-critical reason for the
system to run a graphical user interface, ensure X is not set to start
automatically at boot and remove the X Windows software packages.
There is usually no reason to run X Windows
on a dedicated server system, as it increases the system's attack surface and consumes
system resources. Administrators of server systems should instead login via
SSH or on the text console. |
Rule
Remove the X Windows Package Group
[ref] | By removing the xorg-x11-server-common package, the system no longer has X Windows
installed. If X Windows is not installed then the system cannot boot into graphical user mode.
This prevents the system from being accidentally or maliciously booted into a graphical.target
mode. To do so, run the following command:
$ sudo apt_get groupremove "X Window System"
$ sudo apt_get remove xorg-x11-server-common Warning:
The installation and use of a Graphical User Interface (GUI) increases your attack vector and decreases your
overall security posture. Removing the package xorg-x11-server-common package will remove the graphical target
which might bring your system to an inconsistent state requiring additional configuration to access the system
again. If a GUI is an operational requirement, a tailored profile that removes this rule should used before
continuing installation. | Rationale: | Unnecessary service packages must not be installed to decrease the attack surface of the system. X windows has a long history of security
vulnerabilities and should not be installed unless approved and documented. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_xorg-x11-server-common_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 15, 8, APO13.01, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.6.6, SR 1.13, SR 2.6, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, 2.2.2 | |
|